JP2006280531A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To simplify the initializing operation of the data stored backup in a system of storing the game status data and the game history data separately. <P>SOLUTION: When the initialization of the game status data is confirmed on the side of the microcomputer for game control responding to the operation of a clear switch on the rear of a pachinko game machine, a menu screen for the game parlor involved for initialization of the game history data stored on the side of the microcomputer for a performance control (S421). Only when the menu screen for the game parlor is on display, with the conditions that the operation of clearing the history data is judged to be done with an operation key on the front of the pachinko game machine (S422Y), the game history data stored are initialized (S423). Furthermore, in the variable probability mode, when the non-variable probability jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable display presenting the conditions of ending the variable probability status, the variable probability flag is updated to a reset position upon the start of the variable display. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a coin gaming machine. Specifically, a display device is provided that displays a display result by performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the specific display result is derived and displayed on the display device. The display of the variable display is performed after the end of the specific gaming state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed among the specific display results. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probability variation state in which a probability that a result is the specific display result is higher than a normal game state different from the specific game state.

  As this type of gaming machine, what is generally known in the past, for example, based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are displayed and the display result is derived. A display device for displaying, and the specific display result is controlled to a specific game state advantageous to the player (for example, controlled to the big hit game state) based on the specific display result being derived and displayed on the display device. Based on the derivation display of the special display result, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result after the end of the specific game state is improved over the normal game state different from the specific game state. There was something that was controlled by the probability fluctuation state.

  Game progress in such a gaming machine is controlled by a game control microcomputer. Then, for example, when power supply as a power source supplied to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure, backup data indicating a gaming state when the power supply is stopped is stored, and power supply is started later. When this is done, control for restoring the gaming state is performed based on the stored data. In such a gaming machine, when the backup data is initialized when power supply is started, the game store clerk has initialized the backup data by operating the clear switch.

In addition, for this type of gaming machine, game history data such as the number of out balls and the number of safe balls is accumulated and stored in the gaming machine, and the game history information is based on the gaming history data on the symbol display according to the operation of the gaming machine. (Patent Document 1). Further, with regard to this type of gaming machine, there is a configuration in which the gaming history data stored and stored as described above is backed up and the gaming history information can be accumulated across days, weeks, months, etc. (Patent Document 2). As described above, in the gaming machine that stores the game history data in a backup manner, the game store information is initialized by the game store clerk operating the accumulated data clear switch.
JP-A-7-051460 (paragraph number 0034-0037) JP 2002-035359 (paragraph numbers 0027, 0040, 0055, FIG. 9)

  However, the conventional gaming machine as described above has the following problems. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the game history data as described above is backed up and stored in a gaming machine that stores the game state data as in the conventional case, when the game state data and the game history data are to be initialized, It is necessary to operate the clear switch individually for data. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, the initialization operation of the backed up data is complicated.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to simplify the initialization operation of the data stored in the backup in the configuration in which the game state data and the game history data are respectively stored in the backup. It is to provide a possible gaming machine.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (a game ball wins the first start winning opening 14 and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 16) A display device that performs a variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and derives and displays a display result (for example, a first variable display unit including a first special symbol display 8 and a first decorative variable display unit 8k, a second special symbol) A second variation display unit including a display 9 and a second decoration variation display unit 9k), and a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the specific display result (big hit symbol) being derived and displayed on the display device Based on the fact that the special display result (probability change big hit symbol) is derived and displayed among the specific display results, the display result of the variable display is determined after the end of the specific game state. Specific display result In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to a probability variation state (probability variation control mode, probability variation state) that is higher than a normal gaming state (normal gaming state) that is different from the specific gaming state There,
A game control microcomputer that executes a game control process for controlling the progress of the game and outputs a display control signal (effect control command) for controlling the display device (game control microcomputer 99 in FIG. 4) A game control board (main board 120 in FIG. 4) on which is mounted,
A display control board (production control board 90 in FIG. 6) on which a display control microcomputer (production control microcomputer 118 in FIG. 6) for controlling the display device based on the display control signal is mounted;
Initialization operation means (clear switch 921 in FIG. 2) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine (the power supply board 910 in FIGS. 2 and 7) and outputting an initialization signal (clear signal) according to the operation;
Provided on the front side of the gaming machine (near the hitting ball supply tray 3 in FIG. 1), when a predetermined operation screen (game shop menu screen in FIG. 35, etc.) is displayed on the display device, the display device Display operation means (operation keys 190 in FIGS. 3, 6, etc.) for performing an operation (clearing history data, displaying game history information) of a game history (game history information) performed in the gaming machine in FIG. )
The game control microcomputer is:
Display result determination means for determining in advance whether or not the display result of the variable display in the display device is the specific display result (S56 to S58 in FIG. 24 in the first special symbol process, and further, the second special symbol The same steps in the process)
First end condition (non-probability big hit occurs in S123NO of FIG. 27, the number of fluctuations at the time of probability change becomes the number of times of probability change at S72YES of FIG. 25, The probability variation state is controlled and the variation display time of the identification information is shortened compared to the normal gaming state until the probability variation end determination value R9 becomes the probability variation end determination value in S72a YES of 65. First state control means (S124 to S127 in FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process), the first state control means for controlling to the first state (probability variation flag is set and the time variation flag is set) for controlling the variation time reduction state, FIG. 25 and S71 to S75 in FIG. 65, and the same steps in the second special symbol process),
After the end of the first state, until the second end condition is satisfied (the non-probable large hit symbol has been derived and displayed as a display result in S123NO in FIG. 27, or the variation with a certain change in S72 YES in FIGS. 25 and 65) After the probability variation state ends based on the number of times reaching the probability variation end count, the non-probability large hit symbol has been derived and displayed as a display result in S123NO in FIG. 27, or the number of short-term terminations in S77YES in FIGS. Second state control means for controlling to the non-stochastic variation state and controlling to the variation time shortening state (reset the probability variation flag and set the time shortening flag). In the first special symbol process, S128 and S129 in FIG. 27, S71 and S76 to S79a in FIG. 25 and FIG. And similar steps) in another symbol process treatment,
Probability variation state data (probability variation flag) indicating that the probability variation state data (probability variation flag data) indicating whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state is in the probability variation state when shifting to the probability variation state. Is set to non-stochastic variation state data indicating that the probability variation state is not reached when the probability variation state ends (data in a state where the probability variation flag is reset). (S124 and S127 in FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process, S75 in FIGS. 25 and 65, and the same steps in the second special symbol process),
Time-short state data indicating whether or not the gaming state is the time-varying state shortened state (time-short flag data) indicating whether or not the game state is the time-varying state shortened Set to data (data with the hourly flag set) and non-variable time reduced state data (data with the hourly flag reset) indicating that the variable time reduced state is not reached when the variable time reduced state ends. Short time state data setting means for setting (S125 and S129 in FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process, S79a in FIGS. 25 and 65, and the same steps in the second special symbol process),
Display time data (variation pattern data in which the variation display time is specified) indicating the variation display time from the start of the variation display of the identification information based on the determination result by the display result determination means until the display result is derived and displayed. Is selected from a plurality of types of display time tables (data table in FIG. 9) in which display time data is set in advance (first variation pattern in S202 of FIG. 21 in the first special symbol process). Setting process, and the same steps in the second special symbol process)
Fluctuation display time measuring means for measuring the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation executed based on the display time data selected by the fluctuation display data selection means (first special symbol of S203 of FIG. 21 in the first special symbol process). S81 of FIG. 28 in the variation process, and the same step in the second special symbol process)
Fluctuation display time determination means for determining whether or not the fluctuation display time measured by the fluctuation display time measurement means has reached the fluctuation display time indicated by the display time data selected by the fluctuation display data selection means (for example, the first S82 of FIG. 28 in the first special symbol variation process of S203 of FIG. 21 in the 1 special symbol process, and the same steps in the second special symbol process)),
A game control storage means for storing game state data indicating a progress state of the game and storing the game state data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the figure is backed up by a backup power source). 4 RAM 55),
An initialization signal input unit (I / O port unit 50 in FIG. 4) to which the initialization signal output from the initialization operation means is input;
A game control side initialization signal confirmation means for confirming whether or not the initialization signal is input to the initialization signal input unit (part for executing the processing of S7 in FIG. 15);
Supply of power to the gaming machine is started, and it is confirmed by the gaming control side initialization signal confirmation means that the initialization signal is not input (determined as NO in the process of S7 in FIG. 15). On the condition that the game control recovery means for executing the game control recovery process for recovering the progress state of the game based on the game state data stored in the game control storage means (the processing of S91 to S94 in FIG. 15). Part to execute)
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and it is confirmed by the gaming control side initialization signal confirmation means that the initialization signal has been input (YES in the process of S7 in FIG. 15) And a game control initialization means for executing a game control initialization process for initializing the game state data stored in the game control storage means (a portion for executing the processes of S10 to S12 in FIG. 15), Including
The display control microcomputer is:
In the display device, when the display of the identification information is started to be changed and the change display time determination means determines that the change display time indicated by the display time data selected by the change display data selection means has elapsed. The variable display control means (FIG. 4) that performs control for deriving and displaying the display result according to the determination by the determination means (first effect control process in S611 in FIG. 40, second effect control process in S612 in FIG. 40). Display control function of the production control microcomputer 118),
Based on a display control signal (presence / absence of a probability variation pattern command) from the game control microcomputer, notification control means (S405 in FIG. 45, FIG. 51) performs control for notifying that the variation time is reduced. S831, S832, S837),
Based on the display control signal from the game control microcomputer, the game history data creating means for creating the game history data indicating the history of games played in the gaming machine (part for executing the process of 382 in FIG. 54) )When,
Display control storage means for storing the game history data created by the game history data creation means, and storing the game history data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. RAM mounted on the production control microcomputer 118 of FIG. 6),
A game history display process for executing a game history display process for displaying the game history on the display device based on the game history data stored in the display control storage unit in response to an operation of the display operation unit. Means (S423 in FIG. 41, S366 in FIG. 50);
Based on the display control signal (recovery command) from the gaming control microcomputer, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state data has been initialized in the gaming control microcomputer (for example, a recovery command for a predetermined time by S604 in FIG. 40). A game state data initialization confirmation unit (a part for executing the processing of S604 in FIG. 40) for confirming that the game state data has been initialized when it is determined that is not received.
Supply of power to the gaming machine is started, and it is confirmed by the gaming state data initialization confirmation means that the gaming state data has not been initialized (determined as YES in the processing of S602 in FIG. 40). Based on the above, game history recovery means for enabling the display of game history to be restored based on the game history data stored in the display control storage means before the power supply is stopped (before the power is turned off in S606 in FIG. 40) Function to restore game history)
An initialization operation for initializing the gaming history data when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the gaming state data initialization confirmation means confirms that the gaming state data has been initialized. Operation screen display means for displaying an operation screen (game shop menu screen in FIG. 35) (part for executing the processing of S421 in FIG. 41);
Only when the initialization operation screen is displayed by the operation screen display means, the initialization operation for initializing the game history by the display operation means is enabled (data management at initialization in FIG. 41). When the process is executed, that is, only when the game shop menu image is displayed in S421, the history data can be cleared (S421 in FIG. 41),
When the initializing operation is enabled by the enabling means, the initializing operation is performed by the display operating means (determined that an operation for clearing history data has been performed in S422 of FIG. 41). ) Initialization operation determination means for determining whether or not (the part for executing the processing of S422),
A game history initialization process (S423) for initializing the game history data stored in the display control storage means on condition that the initialization operation determination means determines that an initialization operation has been performed. Game history initialization means (part for executing the process of S423) that executes the process of clearing the history data according to the history data clearing operation in particular.
The variable display data selection means is, when the time-short state data is set to the variable time shortening state data, when the variable time shortening state is used when the display time table is shifted to the variable time shortening state. When display time data is selected from the usage table (data table of FIG. 9B or FIG. 9C) and the time-short state data is set to non-variable time shortened state data, the display time table Display time data is selected from the non-variable time shortening state table (data table of FIG. 9A) used when the state is shifted to the non-variable time shortening state (the probability variation flag and the time shortening flag in S202). Look up the data table according to the set state of, and select and determine the variation display pattern, and in the second special symbol process Similar steps to kick),
When the probability variation state data setting means is shifted to the probability variation state, the variation display data selection means is based on a determination result that is a specific display result other than the special display result by the display result determination means. When the variation display of the identification information based on the selected display time data is started (timing 4 in FIGS. 12D and 64D), the probability variation state data is set as non-probability variation state data ( 27 in FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process, and the same step in the second special symbol process).

  According to such a configuration, at the start of power supply to the gaming machine, the gaming state data is initialized on the gaming control microcomputer side according to the operation of the initialization operation means provided on the rear surface of the gaming machine. When it is confirmed, an initialization operation screen for initializing game history data stored on the production control microcomputer side before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the display device. Then, the stored game history data is initialized on the condition that it is determined that the initialization operation by the display operation means that is effective only when the initialization operation screen is displayed. . For this reason, when the game state data and the game history data are initialized together, the operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine, that is, the operation means that is complicated to operate, is referred to as initialization operation means. It can be limited to operating one operating means. Further, by assigning other necessary operations to the display operation means provided on the front side of the gaming machine, that is, the operation means that can be easily operated, the game state data and the game history data are respectively stored as backups. In this configuration, it is possible to simplify the initialization operation of the data stored in the backup. Furthermore, since the display operation means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, it can be operated by the player, but the initialization operation by the display operation means is performed only when the initialization operation screen is displayed. Since the game history data is initialized, it is a precondition that the initialization operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine is operated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from initializing the game history data without permission.

  In addition, when transition to the probability variation state is performed, when the variation display of the identification information is started based on the determination result as the specific display result other than the special display result, the probability variation state data is changed to the non-probability variation state data. Updated. Thereby, when switching from the 1st state to the 2nd state, the switching timing becomes clear and it can prevent that the period in which a game state is unclear arises. In addition, when the display is changed to the probability variation state, the display result determination unit is configured to play the game with respect to the variation display newly started after the variation display for deriving and displaying the specific display result other than the special display result as the display result. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result according to the state.

(2) The display control microcomputer is:
After the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the display information can be variably displayed (identification information (special symbol, decorative symbol) that can be individually identified). In a normal state), a variation display determination means (S346 in FIG. 48) for determining whether or not the identification information is varied in the display device over a predetermined period;
When it is determined that the variable display is not performed by the variable display determination means (YES in S346 of FIG. 48), the game history based on the game history data is used for the operation by the display operation means. The normal operation screen (player menu screen in FIG. 37 (b)) that can be displayed in response to this is displayed (YES in S346 in FIG. 48, and it is determined in S352 that the enter key has been operated). When the first effect control process flag is switched in S354, the process proceeds to the first game information display process of FIG. 50, and the player menu screen is displayed in S364. Normal operation screen display means (FIG. 50) S364).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a game history based on the game history data when the display device does not display the variation of the identification information over a predetermined period. For this reason, if there is no variable display for a predetermined period, the player can freely view the game history.

(3) The display control microcomputer includes:
A display control signal for instructing each of the identifiable identification information to be variably displayed when the game history is being displayed on the display device (when the first game information display process of FIG. 50 is being executed). Is input to the display control microcomputer (when the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag is set in S628 of FIG. 50), the game history is displayed on the display device. Game history stopping means (S371 in FIG. 50), the first effect control process flag is switched in S372, and the display is stopped by proceeding to the first symbol variation start process in S904 in FIG.
When the game history is canceled by the game history canceling means, the display on the display device is switched to the variation display of the identification information (the first effect control process flag is switched in S372, and the symbol variation start process in S904 in FIG. 47 is performed). It further includes fluctuation display switching means (S372 in FIG. 50) that is switched to an image of symbol fluctuation display when executed.

  According to such a configuration, when a display history is being displayed on the display device, when a display control signal instructing to change and display identification information used in the game is input to the display control microcomputer. In the display device, the display of the game history is stopped and the display is switched to the variation display of the identification information. For this reason, in the display device, the identification information used in the game is preferentially executed over the display of the game history, so that the player can be prevented from erroneously recognizing the variation display of the identification information. In addition, when the variable display is executed, it is not necessary to end the display of the displayed game history.

(4) The game control microcomputer specifies that one of the game control recovery process and the game control initialization process is executed after power supply to the game ball is started. And further includes display control signal output processing means (part for executing the processing of S94 in FIG. 15) for performing a process of outputting a possible power supply start process specific signal (restoration command) as the display control signal,
The display control microcomputer determines whether or not the power supply start process specific signal is input during a predetermined period after the power supply to the game ball is started. It further includes an input determination means (portion for executing the processing of S602 to S604 in FIG. 40),
The gaming state data initialization confirmation unit confirms whether or not the gaming state data has been initialized based on the determination by the start time processing specific signal input determination unit (S604).

  According to such a configuration, after power supply to the game ball is started, one of the game control restoration process and the game control initialization process is executed from the game control microcomputer. A power supply start process specific signal is output as a display control signal, and the power supply start process is specified in a predetermined period after the power supply to the game ball is started by the display control microcomputer. Based on the determination of whether or not a signal is input, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state data has been initialized. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the types of display control signals used for confirming whether or not the game state data has been initialized.

(5) The game control microcomputer outputs a demonstration display control signal (demonstration display command) for instructing to display a demonstration image that is displayed when the identification information that can be identified is not variably displayed for a predetermined period. It further includes demo display control signal output means (S28 in FIG. 16),
When the display control microcomputer inputs the demo display control signal output by the demo display control signal output means (when YES is determined in S634 of FIG. 44 and the demo display command reception flag is set in S635) ) In the display device, after the display of the game history is completed according to the operation by the display operation means, a demonstration image corresponding to the demonstration display control signal is displayed (first game information display process of FIG. 50). 48 is being executed, the first variation pattern command reception waiting process of FIG. 48 including the step of switching the first effect control process to the first demonstration display process is not executed, and there is an end operation for displaying the history data. Later, in S369, the first effect control process is switched to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process. In the first variation pattern command reception waiting process, since the first demonstration display command reception flag is set, the first effect control process is switched to the first demonstration display process in S356, and the demonstration display is executed.) Demo display switching means (S367 to S369 in FIG. 50, S345 and S356 in FIG. 48) is further included.

  According to such a configuration, when the demonstration display control signal is input to the display control microcomputer, after the display of the game history is finished in accordance with the operation by the display operation means in the display device, the display control is performed. A demonstration image corresponding to the signal is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display of the game history that has been displayed according to the operation by the display operation means from being switched to the demonstration image unnecessarily. Thereby, waste of operation can be eliminated.

(6) The display operation means inputs an operation signal output in response to an operation to the display control microcomputer (FIG. 6),
The game history display processing means executes the game history display processing based on the operation signal (S422, S423 in FIG. 41, S363, S366 in FIG. 50).

  According to such a configuration, since the display control microcomputer executes the game history display process based on the operation signal from the display operation means, the process of the game control microcomputer related to displaying the game history The burden can be reduced.

(7) a game area (game area 7) provided with a predetermined winning area;
A launching unit (striking ball launching device 130) for launching a game ball to be shot into the game area;
The game control microcomputer outputs the display control signal for variably displaying the identification information on the display device when the start condition is satisfied in response to a game ball winning in the winning area. (S28 in FIG. 16),
Game ball number counting means (launch ball sensor 194 in FIG. 1 and the like) for counting the number of game balls to be driven into the game area;
The display control storage means stores the number of game balls counted by the game ball number counting means as the game history data (as shown in FIG. 6, the detection signal of the launch ball sensor 194 is sent to the effect control microcomputer 118. The data is input and aggregated as history data in S383 of FIG. 54).

  According to such a configuration, since the number of game balls to be shot into the game area is stored as game history data, the game balls are shot into the game area before being controlled to the specific game state based on the game history data. The number of played balls can be grasped. Therefore, whether the gaming machine has a track record of being easily controlled to a specific gaming state based on displaying the number of game balls that have been thrown into the gaming area as a gaming history before being controlled to the specific gaming state. The player can easily determine the superiority or inferiority of the gaming machine.

(8) The display device displays a plurality of variable display units (for example, a first special display) that performs a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and derives and displays a display result. A plurality of fluctuation display sections including a first fluctuation display section including a symbol display 8 and a first decoration fluctuation display section 8k, and a second fluctuation display section including a second special symbol display 9 and a second decoration fluctuation display section 9k. )
The display result determining means is configured to determine start conditions determined for each of the plurality of change display sections (for a first change display section, a game ball wins a first start winning opening 14, for a first change display section). It is determined in advance whether or not the display result of the variable display of the variable display section where the start condition is satisfied is used as the specific display result when a game ball wins at the second start winning port 16 ( S56 to S58 in FIG. 24 in the first special symbol process for the first variation display unit, and the same steps in the second special symbol process for the second variation display unit),
In the game control microcomputer, the display state determination unit determines that the display result of any one of the plurality of change display units is set as the specific display result by the display result determination unit. Specific gaming state control means (including a first big winning opening opening pre-processing in S205 of FIG. 21, a first big winning opening releasing process in S206, and a first big hit finishing process in S207,
The variation display time measuring means is
Based on the determination of the display result determination means, the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit among the plurality of variation display units (for example, on the second decoration variation display unit 9k in FIG. 59B). The big hit symbol is derived and displayed), and when the variation display of the identification information is executed on the second variation display unit different from the first variation display unit (for example, in FIG. 59 (B), A first display when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit (for example, a first special display). The variation display time in the second variation display unit at the time when the second big hit execution flag is set in the same step in the second special symbol process corresponding to S84 in the first special symbol variation process of the symbol process) of Measurement interrupting means for interrupting measurement (for example, a portion where YES is set in S87 of the first special symbol variation processing of FIG. 28 and the interrupt flag is set and the first special symbol process timer is not subtracted, or, for example, When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first ornament variation display unit 8k and the variation display of the ornament symbols 9a to 9c is executed on the second ornament variation display unit 9k, the first special symbol variation of the first special symbol process is performed. When the first big hit execution flag is set in S84 in the processing, YES is set in S87 of the first special symbol variation processing of FIG. 28, the interruption flag is set, and the first special symbol process timer is subtracted. The same step in the second special symbol process corresponding to the non-existing part), and
A second time point when the specific gaming state ends based on the specific display result being derived and displayed on the first variation display unit (for example, S104 and S105 in the first big hit end process of the first special symbol process) Measurement restarting means for restarting the measurement of the variable display time interrupted by the measurement interrupting means when the second big hit execution flag and the interrupting flag are reset in the same step in the second special symbol process corresponding to (For example, in S80 of the first special symbol variation process of the first special symbol process, or in S104 and S105 in the first big hit end process of the first special symbol process, for example, the first big hit running flag and the interruption flag are set. When reset, a first special symbol process that causes the first special symbol process timer to be subtracted. It includes similar steps) and the second special symbol process processing corresponding to S80 of the first special symbol variation processing process.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit, the measurement of the variation display time in the second variation display unit is interrupted, so that a plurality of variation display units can be displayed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a specific gaming state from occurring. In addition, since the identification information is displayed on the first variation display unit until the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit, the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit. Can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Whether the determination means uses the display result of the variable display as the specific display result according to the gaming state for the variable display newly started after the variable display for deriving and displaying the end specific display result as the display result is started. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not.

  (9) When measurement of the fluctuation display time in the second fluctuation display unit is interrupted by the measurement interruption means (for example, when YES in S824 in FIG. 52 in the first effect control process, that is, an interruption command) When the message is received, the interruption continuous change display means (first special symbol process) is further displayed to indicate that the variable display in the second variable display unit is continued in the second effect control process. In the first symbol variation processing of FIG. 52 in the processing, S826 displaying the message 100 during variation as shown in FIG. 59, FIG. 60 as the variation interruption display on the first decoration variation display unit 8k, and further the second effect control. A similar step in process processing).

  According to such a configuration, when the measurement of the variation display time in the second variation display unit is interrupted, it is displayed that the variation display in the second variation display unit is continued. The variation display of the identification information in the second variation display unit can be interrupted without giving the distrust that the variation display has been stopped.

  (10) When measurement of the variation display time in the second variation display unit is suspended by the measurement suspension unit at the first time point, the second variation display unit differs from the specific display result. The non-specific display result (missing symbol) as the display result is stopped and displayed (FIGS. 59 (C) and 60 (C)). As the change interruption display on the 1 decoration change display portion 8k, S826 for stopping and displaying the combination of outlier symbols as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, and the same step in the second effect control process are further included.

  According to such a configuration, the specific game state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed on the first variation display unit is started, and the measurement of the variation display time on the second variation display unit is interrupted. When not, the non-specific display result is stopped and displayed on the second variation display section. For this reason, the variation display of the identification information in the second variation display section is interrupted without giving the player the distrust that the variation display as the specific display result has been stopped. Can do. Furthermore, since the variation display of the identification information is stopped and displayed on the second variation display unit, the player can be focused on the first variation display unit.

  (11) When the determination unit determines that the display result of the variable display of the first variable display unit is the specific display result, the display result of the variable display is displayed in the second variable display unit. Is notified that the specific display result is obtained (displaying the character 91 and the background 90 for notification shown in the second decoration variation display portion 9k in FIGS. 61A, 61C and 61E). Notice notification means (S501 to S515 in FIG. 46, S834 to S836 in FIG. 51 in the first effect control process, S814 to S818 in FIG. 53, and the second notice in S633 in FIG. 44). The same applies to the effect determination process and the second effect control process.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the first variable display unit is the specific display result, the display result of the variable display is specified display in the second variable display unit. Since the notice of the result is notified in advance, the player can be interested in the variable display of both the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit.

(12) The game control microcomputer is:
When the variation display of the identification information is started, the probability variation state data set by the probability variation state data setting unit or the signal that can specify the time-short state data set by the time-short state data setting unit is changed. It further includes signal output means (S95 in FIG. 29, S98 in FIG. 29, S32 in FIG. 16, test terminal) for outputting when the display is completed.

  According to such a configuration, when the variation display of the identification information is started, the signal that can specify the probability variation state data set by the probability variation state data setting unit or the time-short state data set by the time-short state data setting unit is provided. Since the output of the identification information is output to the outside of the gaming machine, the gaming state that is the basis for determining the game effect can be accurately grasped outside the gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, A display device that displays a variation of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and displays and displays the display result, and the specific display result is derived and displayed on the display device; Based on the specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed among the specific display results, the display result of the variable display after the end of the specific gaming state is Any gaming machine may be used as long as the gaming machine is controlled to a probability variation state in which the probability of the specific display result is higher than the normal gaming state different from the specific gaming state.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. In the following description, the player side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is represented by the front, front, front, front, and the opposite side of the player across the pachinko gaming machine 1 is back, back, rear, rear, back, Shown on the back.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 that is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame, and is pivotally supported on one side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Of the front frame 41, a front door frame (glass frame) 42 that can be opened and closed at the upper front of the front frame 41, and an upper and lower opening at the lower front of the front frame 41. The tray opening / closing frame 43 is used. The main components provided in the front frame 41 include the front door frame 42, the game board 6, the surplus ball receiving tray 4, the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5, the mechanism plate 140 (see FIG. 2), and hitting a hit ball. There is a device 130 (see FIG. 2). The side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 accepts a prepaid card (game card) as a player-owned recording medium and lends a game ball as a game medium to the player (also referred to as lending or ball lending). A card unit device 731 which is a recording medium processing device is attached.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, rental game media based on the use of the remaining amount (also referred to as the balance) owned by the player specified by the record information of the prepaid card as the player-owned recording medium received by the card unit device 731 When the rental balls are paid out, the game balls are loaned (lent) to the player. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game ball, which is a game medium stored in the hit ball supply tray 3 as an upper plate, is ejected and shot into a game area 7 formed on the game board 6. Done. Then, if a prize is generated by the game, a payout condition is established, and a prize ball as a prize game medium is paid out as a prize based on the establishment of the payout condition.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 42 is formed in a frame shape, and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is on the lower surface of the front door frame 42. The hitting ball supply tray 3 stores a prize ball paid out from a prize ball payout opening formed on the upstream side thereof, and supplies a game ball to a launch position. In addition, the hitting ball supply tray 3 has an operation unit (not shown in the figure) that is operated when borrowing a ball via a card unit device 731 provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a predetermined display device (first decoration). When a predetermined operation screen for displaying various information such as game history information, which will be described later, is displayed on the variation display unit 8k or the second decoration variation display unit 9k), various buttons on the display screen are operated. An operation key 190 (including a plurality of keys as will be described later with reference to FIG. 3) is provided as display operation means that can be performed.

  Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 as a lower plate for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle 5 for performing an operation of firing the hitting ball. . The game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the front door frame 42. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  In the game area 7, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “0” to “9”), each of which can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a hit ball wins the first start winning opening 14). The first special symbol display 8 that displays and displays the display result by performing variable display (also referred to as variable display) of all 10 types of numerical symbols of (1), and establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the hit ball is the second start prize) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, all 10 types of numeric symbols from “0” to “9”) that can be identified based on the winning (to the mouth 16) are derived and displayed. A special symbol display 9 is arranged at a predetermined interval. Moreover, the 1st special symbol storage memory display 10 is provided so that the 1st special symbol display 8 may be pinched | interposed from right and left. Similarly, a second special symbol storage memory indicator 11 is provided so as to sandwich the second special symbol indicator 9 from the left and right.

  In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol is a numeric symbol is shown as an example. However, the special symbol is not limited to this, and other identification information such as characters, figures, patterns, etc. other than numerals is shown. Design may be sufficient. Further, the variable display may be an update display by scrolling the symbol in a predetermined direction, an update display by switching the symbol, or an update display while rotating the symbol around the virtual axis. . In this embodiment, an example using a 7-segment display is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, a CRT, a display using plasma display, electroluminescence, or dot matrix display, etc. It may be a display type. Further, it may be a mechanical type such as a rotary drum type display device. In addition, the variable display on the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 means that the above-mentioned update display is performed while blinking the symbols, and when the display result is derived and displayed, the symbols are turned on. To stop and display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the “variation display” is being performed and that the variation display is finished and the “display result is derived and displayed”. If it is.

  Below the first special symbol display 8, the identification information corresponding to the first special symbol display 8 (for example, all 10 kinds of numeric symbols from “0” to “9”) is displayed in a variable manner. A first decoration variation display portion 8k for deriving and displaying the above is provided. Below the second special symbol display 9, the identification information corresponding to the second special symbol display 9 (for example, all 10 kinds of numeric symbols from “0” to “9”) is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is displayed. A second decoration variation display section 9k for deriving and displaying is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 are each composed of a 7-segment LED display. Each of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD), and includes three display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the first decoration shown in FIG. 59 and the like). The identification information is displayed and controlled on the symbols 8a to 8c and the second decorative symbols 9a to 9c). The decorative symbols variably displayed in the three display areas of the left, middle, and right are called a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

  When the display result of the first special symbol display 8 is a first special figure specific display result (for example, an odd symbol) in which a jackpot is generated, the display result of the first decorative variation display unit 8k is also a first in which a jackpot is generated. The display is controlled to be a decoration specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are the same, that is, a doublet), so that the consistency of both display results is maintained. Be controlled. When the display result of the second special symbol display 9 is the second special symbol specific display result (for example, odd symbol) that generates a big hit, the display result of the second decoration variation display portion 9k also generates a big hit. 2 The display result consistency (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are the same, that is, a flat eye) is controlled so that the consistency of both display results is maintained. Controlled.

  The identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8 is called a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 9 is called a second special symbol.

  The identification information displayed in a variable manner in the first decorative variation display unit 8k is called a first decorative symbol, and the first special symbol display 8 is used to enhance the decorative effect of the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8. A symbol with a decorative meaning that is variably displayed in a predetermined relationship with the variation display of a special symbol.

  The identification information displayed in a variable manner in the second decorative variation display unit 9k is called a second decorative symbol, and is used to enhance the decorative effect of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 9. A symbol with a decorative meaning that is variably displayed with a predetermined relationship with the variation display of a special symbol.

  The predetermined relationship includes, for example, a relationship in which the decorative symbol variation display is started when the special symbol variation display is started, or the special symbol variation display is ended and the display result is displayed. This includes a relationship in which the variable display is terminated and the display result is displayed.

  Since the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration variation display portion 8k have the correspondence relationship as described above, the following description may be collectively referred to as a first variation display portion in the following description. . In addition, since the second special symbol display 9 and the second decoration variation display unit 9k have the correspondence relationship as described above, the case where these are collectively referred to as the second variation display unit will be described below. There is.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8, and the first decorative specific display result is derived and displayed on the first decorative variation display portion 8k. Specific game state to be performed, and the second special symbol display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9, and the second ornament specific display result is derived and displayed on the second ornament variation display unit 9k. The gaming state is the same (for example, the number of big hit rounds, the number of winnings and payouts, etc. are the same), but one particular gaming state is configured to be more advantageous than the other particular gaming state. May be.

  In this embodiment, the identification information is displayed by two systems of display units, that is, the first special symbol display unit 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k, and the second special symbol display unit 9 and the second decoration variation display unit 9k. It is the structure which performs the fluctuation display of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of display units are provided and the identification information is variably displayed on a plurality of (arbitrary natural numbers) display units.

  Next, the first special symbol used for variation display on the first special symbol display 8, the first decoration symbol used for variation display on the first ornament variation display unit 8 k, and the variation display on the second special symbol display 9. The second special symbol used and the type of the second decorative symbol used for variation display in the second ornament variation display unit 9k will be described.

  The first special symbol display 8 displays a first special symbol composed of 10 types of numbers from 0 to 9. The 1st decoration fluctuation display part 8k displays the 1st decoration symbol which consists of 10 types of numbers 0-9. When the first special symbol display 8 derives and displays the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) of the first special symbol, which is predetermined as the jackpot symbol, as the display result, the first special symbol specific display result Thus, a big hit occurs (hereinafter referred to as the first big hit). When an odd number of symbols is derived and displayed as a display result by the first special symbol display 8, the first ornament specifying display result that is a doublet is derived and displayed as a display result on the first ornament variation display portion 8k.

  The symbols displayed on the second special symbol display 9 and the second decoration variation display unit 9k in the present embodiment are the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k, respectively. It is the same. When the second special symbol display 9 derives and displays an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) of the second special symbol as a display result, the second special symbol specific display result is obtained and a big hit occurs. (Hereafter referred to as the second big hit). When the odd number is derived and displayed as a display result by the second special symbol display 9, the second decoration specific display result that is a doublet is derived and displayed as a display result on the second decoration variation display portion 9k.

  When any one of “3, 5, 7” is derived and displayed as a display result by the first special symbol display 8, any one of the odd-numbered symbols is derived and displayed as a display result on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. Is done. Further, when any of “3, 5, 7” is derived and displayed as a display result by the second special symbol display 9, any one of the odd symbols of the odd symbol is displayed as the display result on the second decoration variation display portion 9k. Derived and displayed. One of the first variation display unit including the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k, and the second variation display unit including the second special symbol display 8 and the second decoration variation display unit 8k. On the other hand, when such a display result is derived and displayed, after the big hit gaming state (the first big hit gaming state or the second big hit gaming state) corresponding to the variable display portion from which such a display result is derived and displayed is finished. In both of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit, the probability variation control mode (in the embodiment described below, the probability variation may be referred to as an abbreviated term, for example, the probability variation control mode). After the control, the variable time reduction control mode (in the embodiment shown below, the variable time reduction may be called abbreviated as “short time”, for example, short time control mode) can be controlled.The probability variation control mode and the short time control mode are not in the state of these control modes, and the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is compared with the normal gaming state that is not in the big hit gaming state. Is included in the special gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the display result of the big hit symbol is likely to be a display result.

  When controlled to the probability variation control mode, it is controlled to a probability variation state that is a probability variation state, which will be described later, and to a time reduction state that is a variation time shortening state. The state controlled in such a probability variation control mode is referred to as a first state. Further, when controlled to the time reduction control mode, it is controlled to the non-probability change state and to the time reduction state. Such a state controlled to the short-time control mode is referred to as a second state.

  The probability variation state is a control state that is improved as compared to the normal gaming state in which the probability of occurrence of a big hit is different from the probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the probability of jackpot occurrence is improved, so that the display result of the variable display is likely to be the display result of the jackpot symbol from a probabilistic viewpoint, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Among jackpot symbols, jackpot symbols in which such a probability variation state occurs when derived and displayed as a variation display result are referred to as probability variation jackpot symbols. The time-short state is a first special symbol display 8, a second special symbol display 9, a first decoration variation display unit 8 k, a second special symbol display 9, which will be described later, as compared to a normal state other than the time-short state. It means a control state in which the display results are derived and displayed at an early stage by shortening the variable display time of the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13 described later. In the short-time state, the display time of the fluctuation of the symbol is shortened, so that the number of reserved memories to be described later is digested early, and the start winning that occurs exceeding the upper limit (for example, “4”) of the number of reserved memories becomes invalid. Since the display results are frequently derived and displayed in a short period of time and it is easier to derive and display the winning display results at an early stage, the display result of the variable display becomes the display result of the big hit symbol from a time efficient viewpoint. It becomes easy and it becomes a game state advantageous for a player.

  After the jackpot gaming state in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, control is made to the probability variation control mode. The probability variation control mode is within a range in which the number of variation displays in the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit (total variation display number of both variation display units) reaches a predetermined variation display number (for example, 100 times). Will continue. When the display result of the non-probable large hit symbol different from the probability variable big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the fluctuation display result in one of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit in the probability variation control mode, the first variation The probability variation control mode ends even if the total number of variation displays in the display unit and the second variation display unit has not reached the predetermined variation display number defined as the duration of the probability variation state. To do.

  As described above, after the probability variation control mode is terminated because the number of variation displays has reached the predetermined number of variation displays or the variation display result of the non-probability variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed, control is performed to the non-probability variation state. At the same time, it is controlled to the time-shortening control mode for controlling to the time-shortening state. The time reduction control mode is within a range in which the number of fluctuation displays in the first fluctuation display section and the second fluctuation display section (total fluctuation display count of both fluctuation display sections) reaches a predetermined fluctuation display count (for example, 100 times). Will continue. In the time reduction control mode, when the display result of the non-probable variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result on one of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit, the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit Even if the total number of variable displays in the variable display section has not reached the predetermined number of variable displays defined as the duration of the short time control mode, the short time control mode ends.

  Further, for each of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9, when “1” or “9” which is a non-probable large hit symbol is derived and displayed as a display result, only the big hit gaming state is displayed. The probability variation state and the short time state as described above do not occur. When “1” or “9” is derived and displayed as a display result on the first special symbol display 8, “0” or an even number of zeros, which are combinations of non-probable variation big hit symbols, are displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. The eyes are derived and displayed as a display result. Similarly, when “1” or “9”, which is a non-probable variation big hit symbol, is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9 as a display result, it is a combination of the non-probable big hit symbol in the second decoration variation display portion 9k. “0” or an even number of blue eyes is derived and displayed as a display result.

  In addition, when either “0”, which is a missing symbol, or an even symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8 as a display result, a combination of missing symbols is displayed in the first decoration variation display portion 8k. The incision (combination other than the doublet) is derived and displayed as a display result. When the second special symbol display 9 derives and displays either “0” or an even symbol as a display result as a display result, the second decoration variation display unit 9k is a combination of a dissociated symbol. (A combination other than a flat eye) is derived and displayed as a display result.

  Of the first special figure specific display result, the first special figure specific display result (here, “3, 5, 7”) in which the above-mentioned probability variation state occurs is expressed as “first special figure special display result (probability large hit symbol). The first special figure specific display result (here, “1, 9”) in which the probability variation state does not occur is referred to as the “first special figure non-special display result (non-probable variation big hit symbol)”. In addition, among the second special figure specific display results, the second special figure specific display result (here, “3, 5, 7”) in which the above-described certainty change state occurs is referred to as “second special figure specific display result (probable big hit The second special figure specific display result (here, “1, 9”) in which the probability variation state does not occur is referred to as the “second special figure non-special display result (non-probable variation big hit symbol)”.

  In the present embodiment, the types of symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k, and on the second special symbol display unit 9 and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, respectively. Although the example which becomes the same is demonstrated, it displays not only by this but with the 1st special symbol display device 8 and the 1st decoration fluctuation display part 8k, and the 2nd special symbol display device 9 and the 2nd decoration fluctuation display part 9k. Different types of symbols may be used.

  As described above, the probability variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed on either the first fluctuation display portion or the second fluctuation display portion, so that the first fluctuation display portion and the second fluctuation are displayed after the big hit gaming state ends. Both the display unit and the display unit are controlled to the probability variation state and to the probability variation control mode which is controlled to the time reduction state. Then, after the end of the probability variation control mode, both the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit are controlled to the non-probability variation state and to the time reduction control mode in which the time variation control is controlled.

  In the probability variation control mode, the probability variation state and the short time state are started after the end of the big hit gaming state when the result of the probability variation big hit symbol is displayed, but the subsequent variation display count is the predetermined variation display as described above. The probability variation state ends when the number of times is reached or when a big hit gaming state with a non-probability variable big hit symbol occurs. In this case, the time-short state ends when the probability-variable control mode ends, but since the time-short state is further controlled in the time-shortening control mode started thereafter, the time-varying state is substantially changed. The short time state started in the control mode is the time until the variation display count reaches the predetermined variation display count as described above after the probability variation state ends, or until the big hit gaming state with the non-probable variation big hit symbol occurs. Will continue.

  When the hit ball wins the first start winning opening 14, the first extraction means realized in the first special symbol process described later is the numerical data updated by the numerical data update means (for example, a big hit determination random number, etc. ). The numerical data extracted by the first extracting means is stored in a first reserved storage buffer (for example, RAM 55 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the main board 120) as a reserved storage means so that the extraction order can be specified. The player is notified of the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer as the reserved storage means, based on the number of lighting of the LED of the first special symbol reserved storage display 10 described above. The numerical data stored in this way is also referred to as first start winning storage data. The first special symbol hold memory display 10 is composed of four LEDs, and is effective start winning (in this embodiment, the number of numerical data stored in the first hold memory buffer is less than 4). The number of times the LED is turned on is increased every time a ball hits the first start winning opening 14), and the number of times the LED is turned on is reduced by 1 every time the first special symbol display 8 starts to display fluctuation.

  When the hit ball wins the second start winning opening 16, the second extracting means realized in the second special symbol process described later is the numerical data updated by the numerical data updating means (for example, a big hit determination random number, etc. ). The numerical data extracted by the second extracting means is stored in a second reserved storage buffer (for example, RAM 55 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the main board 120) as the reserved storage means so that the extraction order can be specified. The number of numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer as the reserved storage means is notified to the player based on the number of lighting of the LED of the second special symbol reserved storage display 11 described above. The numerical data stored in this way is also referred to as second start winning storage data. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 11 is composed of four LEDs, and is effective start winning (in this embodiment, the number of numerical data stored in the second hold storage buffer is less than 4). Whenever a ball hits the second start winning opening 16), the number of lighting of the LED is increased, and the number of lighting of the LED is decreased by 1 every time the second special symbol display 9 starts the variable display.

  The numerical data (random number) stored in the first reserved storage buffer starts the variable display of the first special symbol display 8 when the variable display start condition of the first special symbol display 8 is satisfied. This data indicates that the starting condition is satisfied. The numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer satisfies the start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol display 9 when the variable display start condition of the second special symbol display 9 is satisfied. This is data indicating that the Such numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer is also called hold storage data.

  Further, in this embodiment, numerical data (for example, jackpot determination) extracted by the first extraction means and the second extraction means (for example, S44) are respectively stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer. (For example, random numbers for use), up to four numerical data items that do not yet satisfy the start condition (for example, the big hit gaming state and the end of the previous variation display) are stored as a predetermined upper limit number. The upper limit number of numerical data that can be stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer is not limited to the above, and the upper limit number may be 20 (any integer), for example. Further, the upper limit value is changed (for example, changed from 4 to 20) based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the display result is changed to the specific gaming state based on the special display result). It may be configured.

  Also, below the first special symbol display 8, a first variable winning device 15 having a first start winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided. The winning ball that has entered the first start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 62. Further, the first variable winning device 15 that performs the opening / closing operation having the first start winning port 14 is provided with a pair of left and right movable pieces. The movable piece of the first variable winning device 15 is opened by the solenoid 71. When the movable piece of the first variable winning device 15 is opened by the solenoid 71, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the first start winning opening 14 (easier to start winning), which is advantageous to the player. .

  Also, below the second special symbol display 9, a second variable winning device 17 having a second start winning port 16 through which a game ball can be won is provided. The winning ball that has entered the second start winning opening 16 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 67. The second variable winning device 17 that performs the opening / closing operation having the second start winning port 16 is provided with a pair of left and right movable pieces. The movable piece of the second variable winning device 17 is opened by the solenoid 74. When the movable piece of the second variable winning device 17 is opened by the solenoid 74, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 16 (starting winning becomes easier), which is advantageous for the player. .

  Below the first start winning opening 14, a first special variable prize that is opened by the solenoid 72 at the big hit based on the first special symbol display result being derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8. A device 20 is provided. The first special variable winning device 20 includes a first big winning opening 21 inside. The solenoid 72 is means for opening and closing an opening / closing door provided on the front surface of the first special variable winning device 20.

  The first special winning opening 21 of the first special variable winning device 20 is provided with a V winning area and a 10-count winning area different from the V winning area. Of the winning balls led from the first grand prize opening 21 and guided to the back of the game board 6, the winning ball that has entered one (V winning area) is detected by the first V winning switch 64 and the other (10 The winning ball that has entered the (count winning area) is detected by the first count switch 63. On the back of the game board 6, there is also provided a solenoid (not shown here and shown as a solenoid 73 in FIG. 4) for driving a path switching member (seesaw) for switching the path in the first big prize opening 21. ing.

  Below the variable winning device 17, the second special variable winning device 22 that is opened by the solenoid 75 in the big hit based on the second special symbol specific display result being derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9. Is provided. The second special variable winning device 22 includes a second large winning opening 23 inside. The solenoid 75 is means for opening and closing an opening / closing door provided on the front surface of the second special variable winning device 22.

  The second special winning opening 23 of the second special variable winning device 22 is provided with a V winning area and a 10-count winning area different from the V winning area. Of the winning balls led to the back of the game board 6 from the second grand prize opening 23, the winning ball that has entered one (V winning area) is detected by the second V winning switch 69 and the other (10 The winning ball that has entered the (count winning area) is detected by the second count switch 68. On the back of the game board 6, there is also provided a solenoid (not shown here and shown as a solenoid 76 in FIG. 4) for driving a path switching member (seesaw) for switching the path in the second big prize opening 23. ing.

  In this embodiment, the first special variable winning device 20 and the second special symbol display 9 that open and close based on the first special symbol specific display result derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8 are displayed on the first special symbol display 8. Although the second special variable winning device 22 is opened and closed based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed, it may be configured to include only one special variable winning device. That is, a special variable winning device that is controlled to open and close based on the first special symbol specific display result derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8, and the second special symbol specific display on the second special symbol display 9. The special variable winning device that is controlled to open and close based on the result being derived and displayed may be configured using the same special variable winning device.

  In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 15 related to establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol display 8 and the second variable winning device 17 related to establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol display 9 are provided. Although the example with which each was provided was demonstrated, you may make it provide not only this but the variable prize-winning apparatus in connection with starting condition establishment corresponding to any one special symbol display. Further, in the configuration including only one variable winning device as described above, the variable winning device is configured so as to be related to the establishment of the starting condition of one of the variable display units (for example, only the first special symbol display 8). Alternatively, this variable winning device may be related to the establishment of the starting conditions of the two variable display units (the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9). In that case, when the game ball is won at the start winning opening of the variable winning device, it fluctuates in any fluctuation display section (for example, either the first special symbol display 8 or the second special symbol display 9). It is good also as a structure which selects whether a display is performed, and it is good also as a predetermined order (for example, for example) predetermined about two fluctuation display parts (for example, the 1st special symbol display 8 and the 2nd special symbol display 9). The first special symbol display unit 8 and the second special symbol display unit 9 may be configured to perform variable display by alternating variable display).

  On the lower left side of the first decoration variation display portion 8k, there is provided a first normal symbol display 12 composed of a pair of LEDs marked with “◯” and “X”. The first normal symbol display 12 is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball passes through the first gate 28 and is detected by the first gate switch 61, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and stored in the first normal symbol buffer of the RAM 55 mounted on the main board 120. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of random numbers for determination per normal symbol that can be stored in the first normal symbol buffer of the RAM 55 is four. If the number of random numbers for normal symbol determination stored in the first normal symbol buffer does not reach the upper limit, that is, the number of random numbers for determination per normal symbol stored in the first normal symbol buffer is 4. If the number has not been reached, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted. If the display state of the normal symbol on the first normal symbol display 12 can be changed (“◯” and “x” are alternately lit), the normal display on the first normal symbol display 12 is normal. The symbol variation display is started. If the first normal symbol display 12 is not in a state where it is possible to start the variable display in which the display state changes, the random number for determination per normal symbol is stored in the first normal symbol buffer, so that the number of random numbers for determination per normal symbol is stored. Increase by one. Further, below the first normal symbol display 12, a first normal symbol hold storage indicator having a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of LEDs for displaying the number of stored random numbers for determination per normal symbol. 18 is provided. The first normal symbol storage memory display 18 increases the number of LEDs that are turned on each time a game ball passes through the first gate 28 and is detected by the first gate switch 61. Then, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 each time the first normal symbol display 12 starts the variable display of the normal symbols (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  In this embodiment, the left and right lamps marked with “◯” and “x” (the symbols become visible when lit) are alternately lit on the first normal symbol display 12 so that the normal symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display is performed, and the fluctuation display normally continues for a standard fluctuation time (for example, 29.2 seconds). Then, if the upper lamp with “◯” is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a win. Whether or not to win is determined based on the value of numerical data (normal random number for symbol determination) extracted when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 and the first gate switch 61 detects the game ball. It is determined by whether or not it matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol. When the display result of the variable display on the first normal symbol display 12 is a win, the first variable winning device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball wins the first start winning opening 14. It becomes easy to do. That is, the state of the first variable winning device 15 changes from an unfavorable state to an advantageous state to the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol.

  The first normal symbol display unit 12 and the first normal symbol hold storage display unit 18 have been described above. The second normal symbol display unit 13 and the second normal symbol hold storage display unit are displayed at the lower right of the second decoration variation display unit 9k. A container 19 is provided. As with the first normal symbol display 12, the second normal symbol display 13 can also variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols. When a game ball passes through the second gate 29 and is detected by the second gate switch 66, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and stored in the second normal symbol buffer of the RAM 55 mounted on the main board 120. . In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol that can be stored in the second ordinary symbol buffer of the RAM 55 is four. Based on this stored number, the second normal symbol display 13 performs a variable display. Further, based on this stored number, the LED is turned on in the second normal symbol holding storage display 19. When the display result of the variable display on the second normal symbol display 13 is a win, the second variable winning device 17 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball wins the second start winning port 16. It becomes easy to do. That is, the state of the variable winning device 17 changes from an unfavorable state to an advantageous state to the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol.

  In the short time state, in addition to the above-described control for shortening the variation time, in the first variable winning device 15 and the second variable winning device 17, one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening is set higher than the normal gaming state. Control is performed. When the opening time or the number of times of opening of the first variable winning device 15 and the second variable winning device 17 is increased from the normal gaming state, starting winnings to the first starting winning port 14 and the second starting winning port 16 are likely to occur. Thereby, in the short-time state, the probability that the number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 within a predetermined period increases and the winning symbol becomes higher than the normal gaming state. This is a more advantageous state.

  In addition, in the game area 7, in addition to the above-described winning opening, a plurality of winning areas called normal winning openings are provided (not shown). Each of the normal winning ports has a normal winning switch for detecting a winning game ball.

  On the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative lamps 25 that are blinked during the game. In the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. Game effect lamps 40 are provided on the upper outer periphery, the left outer periphery, and the right outer periphery of the game area 7 in the front door frame 42. Also, in the vicinity of the left and right game effect lamps 40, a prize ball LED (not shown in FIG. 1 and shown in FIG. 4, etc.) that lights when there is a remaining number of prize balls, and lights when the supply ball runs out. A spherical LED (not shown in FIG. 1 and shown in FIG. 4 and the like) is provided.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. In the present embodiment, the reach display mode (reach) means that the symbols that have not been stopped when the stopped symbols constitute a part of the jackpot symbol, and that all or one of them is displayed. This is a state in which the symbols of the part are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the reach display mode in the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 is a specific display result (“1, 3, 5, 7, 9”) blinking. This state is referred to as a reach display mode or reach.

  Further, the reach display mode in the first decoration variation display portion 8k and the second decoration variation display portion 9k is that an effective line that is a hit is determined by stopping a predetermined symbol, and a part on the effective line is determined. When a predetermined symbol is stopped in the display area, a state in which the variable display is performed in the display area on the active line that has not been stopped (for example, the first decoration change display portion 8k, the second decoration, etc.) A state in which the same display is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas among the left, middle, and right display areas in the variable display portion 9k, and the display areas in the middle are still in the variable display state). In addition, all or a part of the display area on the active line is synchronously displayed while constituting all or a part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the first ornament variation display portion 8k, the second ornament variation table Left in section 9k, in variation displayed in all of the right of the display area have been made, always state variation displayed with the same pattern are aligned is made) that reach the display mode or reach.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. In addition, during the reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a symbol (special symbol or the like)) is displayed, or the first ornament variation display unit 8k and / or the second ornament variation display is displayed. The display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background of the part 9k may be changed. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display.

  Moreover, about each of the 1st fluctuation | variation display part and the 2nd fluctuation | variation display part, it alert | reports that either one fluctuation | variation display part will be a big hit for the fluctuation | variation display result in the other fluctuation | variation display part. There is a case where a jackpot notice is given as a notice effect. In the case of the present embodiment, as the jackpot notice, the one change display unit that performs the notice effect before the change display of the notice target is performed on the other change display unit that is the change display part to be notified. A continuous notice is performed in which the notice is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 drives the driving motor by operating the hitting operation handle 5, and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to hit the game ball 7 into the game area 7 (see FIG. 2). Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device 130 enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail mounted in a circular shape on the game board 6 so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. . In the vicinity of the entrance of the hit ball in the game area 7, a launch ball sensor 194 is provided which is a magnetic sensor for detecting the game ball to be shot into the game area 7. In addition, as a sensor for detecting a game ball to be thrown into the game area 7, it may be provided in a supply path of game balls to the hit ball launching device 130 to detect the supplied game balls. Such a sensor for detecting a game ball may be a sensor for optically detecting the game ball, and any detection method may be adopted.

  When the hit ball enters the first start winning opening 14 and is detected by the first start opening switch 62, if the first special symbol display 8 can start the fluctuation display (for example, the big hit game end or the previous fluctuation display) ), The variable display on the first special symbol display 8 is started. If the variable display on the first special symbol display 8 is not ready to start, the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory buffer (for example, a big hit determination random number) is increased by 1, and the first special symbol reserved The number of lighting of the LED of the memory display 10 is increased.

  Further, when the hit ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and is detected by the second start opening switch 67, it is in a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol display 9 can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous time End of fluctuation display), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 9 is started. If the variable display on the second special symbol display unit 9 is not ready to start, the number of numerical data stored in the second reserved memory buffer (for example, a random number for jackpot determination) is increased by 1, and the second special symbol reserved The number of lighting of the LED of the memory display 11 is increased.

  The fluctuation display of the first special symbol display 8 stops when a certain time has elapsed. When the first special symbol display 8 at the time of the stop becomes a big hit symbol, the state shifts to the first big hit gaming state as the first specific gaming state. In the first big hit gaming state, the first special winning prize port 21 is used by the first special variable prize winning device 20 until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hit balls win the first big prize winning opening 21. Is released. It should be noted that until a predetermined period of time elapses after the first special prize winning device 20 is opened and closed by the first special variable prize winning device 20, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the first big prize winning opening 21. Is one round in the jackpot gaming state. When the first special variable prize winning device 20 opens the first big prize opening 21, the hit ball enters the V prize area in the first big prize opening 21 and is detected by the first V prize switch 64. And the first special prize winning device 20 opens the first big prize opening 21 again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds).

  As described above, when the stop symbol at the time of the variable stop of the first special symbol indicator 8 is the probability variation big hit symbol, the first big hit gaming state is controlled, and after the first big hit gaming state is finished, the probability changing state is entered. Controlled to the probability variation control mode.

  The fluctuation display on the second special symbol display 9 stops when a certain time has elapsed. When the second special symbol display 9 at the time of the stop becomes a big hit symbol, the state shifts to the second big hit gaming state as the second specific gaming state. In the second big hit gaming state, the second special prize winning device 23 is used by the second special variable prize winning device 22 until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hit balls win the second big prize winning port 23. Is released. It should be noted that until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the second special prize-winning device 22 is opened and closed by the second special variable prize-winning device 22, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the second big prize-winning port 23. Is one round in the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the second special prize winning device 22 opens the second big prize opening 23, the hit ball enters the V prize area in the second big prize opening 23 and is detected by the second V prize switch 69. And the second special prize winning device 22 opens the second big prize opening 23 again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds).

  As described above, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol display 9 when the fluctuation is stopped is the probability change big hit symbol, it is controlled to the second big hit game state, and after the second big hit game state ends, the probability change state is entered. Controlled to the probability variation control mode.

In addition, the specific game state according to the present invention is not limited to the above, and may be a state in which any one of the following controls 1 to 5 or a combination of controls is executed.
1. A variable winning device that can change between a first state that facilitates winning of a hit ball and a second state in which the hit ball cannot win or that is difficult to win, is changed to the first state continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time. 1. Control to A variable winning device that can change between a first state that makes it easy to win a hit ball and a second state that makes it difficult or difficult to win a ball, with the detection of a hit ball in a specific winning or passing area. 2. Control for setting to the first state continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time. 3. Control to discharge a predetermined number of prize balls directly regardless of the winning of the hit ball. 4. Control for adding a valuable number to a storage medium (card, receipt, etc.) having a valuable value FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A back pack 81 a is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 6. The back pack 81a is formed with an opening (not shown) through which the first decoration variation display portion 8k and the second decoration variation display portion 9k face. A first decoration variation display portion 8k, a second decoration variation display portion 9k, and a liquid crystal box 81b for housing these display portions are attached to the back pack 81a.

  The effect control board box 125 is directly attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal box 81b. In this effect control board box 125, a lamp driver board 93, an audio frame lamp board 92, and an effect control board 90 are accommodated and attached.

  The voice frame lamp board 92 is a combination of the decorative lamp 25, the game effect lamp 40, the speaker 27, etc. provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the game board 6 according to the information signal from the main board 120. Drive control is performed. Here, the information signal refers to a signal indicating various information such as a control command. The voice frame lamp board 92 outputs a control signal to the lamp driver board 93 that drives the decoration lamp 25 provided on the game board 6, thereby controlling the lighting state of the decoration lamp 25 by the lamp driver board 93.

  The effect control board 90 controls the display states of the first decoration change display part 8k and the second decoration change display part 9k in response to the effect control command for instructing the effect control from the main board 120. Further, the effect control board 90 exchanges information signals with the voice frame lamp board 92.

  Also, below the back pack 81a, there are a first special symbol display 8, a second special symbol display 9, a first special symbol hold storage display 10, a second special symbol hold storage display 11, a first normal symbol. Provided corresponding to each of the display unit 12, the second normal symbol display unit 13, the first normal symbol hold storage display unit 18, and the second normal symbol hold storage display unit 198, in order to operate the corresponding display unit A design board box (not shown) in which a board and a predetermined relay board are accommodated is attached.

  A main board mounting base 135 is provided on the rear surface of the pattern board box so as to be hinged on the left side so as to be freely opened and closed. A main board box 136 is attached to the main board mounting base 135. Since it comprised in this way, the main board | substrate box 136 can be opened and closed, and it can make it easy to perform maintenance of the 1st, 2nd special variable prize-winning devices 20 and 22 etc. which are provided in the winning ball guidance cover body. A main board 120 is accommodated and attached in the main board box 136. In the present embodiment, since the main board 120 is attached to the game board 6, when the game board is replaced with a new game board, the main board 120 can be replaced together.

  Here, the structure of the main board box 136 will be described. The main board box 136 covers the main board box cover on the main board box base, inserts the caulking screws into the caulking parts provided on the left and right, and screws them together, and seals them with caulking caps to cut the caulking parts. Unless otherwise configured, it cannot be opened. Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the main board box 136 is opened based on whether or not the crimped portion is cut.

  A relay board mounting box 383 in which a predetermined relay board is accommodated is attached to the upper right of the back pack 81a. A board external terminal board 96 is attached to the rear surface of the relay board mounting box 383. This board external terminal board 96 is game information necessary for business management of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, jackpot 1 information notifying that the jackpot gaming state is in effect, a jackpot gaming state with a probability variation symbol, and the jackpot state. 2 jackpot information that informs that the probability fluctuation due to the middle and its jackpot is in progress (a signal that continues to be output during the jackpot and the probability fluctuation), the probability that the probability fluctuation after the jackpot state is terminated by the probability variation pattern Fluctuation information, starting port information for informing the number of hit balls detected by the first and second starting port switches 62, 67, and the number of symbol determinations for informing the number of fluctuation displays of the first and second special symbol indicators 8, 9. 1 information, symbol fixed number 2 information for notifying the number of variable display times of the first and second normal symbol indicators 12 and 13, and the number of bonuses 2 for notifying the number of opening and closing of the first and second variable winning devices 15 and 17. Has an external connection terminal (not shown) for outputting the management computer installed the distribution, etc.) in the game arcade, the information is adapted to be supplied from the main board 120. Further, information such as which symbol has been a big hit and which symbol has been stopped may be output.

  Next, the configuration of the mechanism plate 140 provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 2, a mechanism plate 140 is arranged downstream of a prize ball tank 147 that mainly stores prize balls and a plurality of prize balls stored in the prize ball tank 147 in two rows (in this embodiment). An upper component portion provided with a ball alignment rail member 148 that guides while aligning to the side, a ball passage cover member 156 that has a curve rail portion and guides a ball from the curve rail portion, and a prize ball based on winning a prize An intermediate component provided with a ball payout device 154 (in this embodiment, pays out a ball, but only a prize ball may be paid out) and a hit ball including a winning ball mainly driven into the game board 6 Formed integrally on the mechanism plate main body 141 so that the structure for processing and the lower structure part provided with the structure for guiding the winning ball to the hitting ball supply tray 3 and the surplus ball receiving tray 4 constitute an opening window. Has been.

  The mechanism plate main body 141 constitutes an upper part and a right side part (viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a left side part (viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and a lower part of the mechanism plate main body 141, respectively. The upper plate 142, the left side plate 143, and the lower plate 144 are connected by mounting screws.

  Next, the configuration of the mechanism plate 140 will be described for each component. First, in the upper component part, a prize ball tank 147 for storing a large amount of prize balls and award balls supplied from the prize ball tank 147 are arranged in a plurality of rows (in this embodiment, two rows) by a partition wall. The ball alignment rail member 148 that is caused to flow down and the curved rail portion that changes the prize ball guided by the ball alignment rail member 148 from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction toward the ball dispensing device 154 described later. The frame external terminal plates 102 are provided at predetermined positions on the upper plate 142, respectively.

  A ball leveling member 149 is swingably suspended from the upper part on the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148, and the ball flowing down in two upper and lower stages on the ball alignment rail member 148 becomes a ball leveling member 149. One stage is formed by the action of a buried weight (no symbol). A frame external terminal plate 102 having an external connection terminal to which an external signal line is connected is attached to the upper part on the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148. The mounting portion of the frame external terminal plate 102 is recessed so that the protruding portion of the solder surface does not contact. As an external connection terminal provided on the external terminal board 102 for a frame, as a connector for connecting a signal line between the outside (for example, a management computer) and the pachinko gaming machine 1, a connector for outputting the number of prize balls, Connectors for outputting signals from the first and second door opening switches 111 and 112 are provided.

  A first door opening switch 111 and a second door opening switch 112 are provided on the back of the mechanism plate 140 at the upper left portion of the prize ball tank 147 and the upper right portion of the frame external terminal plate 102, respectively. . The first door opening switch 111 in the present embodiment detects that the front door frame 42 and the front frame 41 are opened, and that the mechanism plate 140 and the front frame 3 are opened. The second door opening switch 112 detects that the front frame 3 and the outer frame 2 are opened. The first door opening switch 111 and the second door opening switch 112 are connected to the frame external terminal plate 102. As described above, since the first door opening switch 111 and the second door opening switch 112 are provided, the open state of the outer frame 2, the front frame 41, and the front door frame 42 can be confirmed by an external device or the like.

  Next, the structure of the intermediate structure part located in the upper board 142 is demonstrated. A ball passage (not shown) through which a sphere passes is formed on the surface side of the intermediate component. This ball removal passage communicates with the downstream portion of the ball removal passage, which will be described later, and guides the balls waiting on the ball alignment rail member 148 and the prize ball tank 147 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed). This will lead to the recovery of islands. The guidance of the sphere to the ball passage is performed by releasing a ball stopper (not shown) provided on the ball passage cover member 156.

  In addition, a ball passage cover member 156 having a curve rail portion and a ball passage portion connected to the downstream side of the above-described ball alignment rail member 148 is attached to the upper portion of the intermediate component portion. The curved rail portion of the ball passage cover member 156 branches the ball flowing down from the ball alignment rail member 148 to either the ball passage or the ball passage (not shown) for guiding the ball to the ball dispensing device 154. is there. A ball dispensing device 154 is disposed on the downstream side of the curved rail portion.

  On the downstream side of the ball passage cover member 156, the ball break switch 157 is detachable by a locking piece at a position where it can detect the presence of 27 to 28 game balls between the ball payout device 154 and the ball dispensing device 154. It is installed. The ball break switch 157 is connected to a sunpack relay board 101 described later. When the ball break switch 157 no longer detects a ball, the ball breaker switch 157 inputs a signal to the payout control board 98 and the main board 120 via the sunpack relay board 101, and the payout of the ball payout device 154 described later will be described later. The operation of the motor 115 is stopped to disable the prize ball payout. Below the ball passage cover member 156, a ball payout device 154 for paying out the winning balls and the rental balls is attached.

  The ball dispensing device 154 divides and dispenses the game balls guided by the ball passage cover member 156 one by one by rotating a ball dispensing member (not shown) by a dispensing motor 115 made of a stepping motor. The ball dispensing member is formed with a disk portion, and a plurality of (three) projecting portions are formed on both side surfaces of the disk portion so as to project the balls, respectively. Between the parts, it is formed as a recess for receiving and guiding balls. At the ball outlet of the ball dispensing device 154, a dispensing number count switch 116 is provided. The payout number count switch 116 detects a game ball paid out from the ball payout device 154. Accordingly, the number of balls actually discharged from the ball payout device 154 can be counted based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. In addition, the ball discharge port in the present embodiment is composed of one discharge port, and includes a ball discharge port that discharges a ball discharged from the ball dispensing device 154 as a rental ball, and a prize ball discharge port discharged as a prize ball. It is configured in a combined form.

  Next, the lower component (lower plate 144) of the mechanism plate 140 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the lower component is attached with a payout control board box 123 for receiving the payout control board 98 on the right side when viewed from the back, and holds the power supply board 910 on the left side when viewed from the back. A power supply board box 122 is attached. The payout control board box 123 is also configured in the same manner as the main board box 136 described above, and it is easy to determine whether or not the payout control board box 123 has been opened depending on whether or not the crimping portion is cut. Judgment can be made.

  A winning ball guiding passage (not shown) for guiding a winning ball and an out ball are guided to the front side (the inner side of the mechanism board main body 141 facing the game board 6) of the lower component to which the payout control board box 123 is attached. An out ball passage (not shown) is formed, and on the back side of the lower component (outside of the mechanism plate main body 141), a prize ball passage, a communication passage, an extra ball passage are formed, and a downstream portion of the ball removal passage is also formed. Is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the right side portion (hereinafter referred to as the right side lower component) as viewed from the back of the lower component of the mechanism plate 140 will be described. Although illustration is omitted, a prize ball passage is formed on one side upper part of the lower right component part of the mechanism plate 140, and an upper plate communication port is formed at the lower end of the prize ball passage. The upper plate communication port guides the prize ball to the hitting ball supply tray 3 provided on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A communication passage is formed at one side of the upper plate communication port, and an excess ball passage is connected downstream of the communication passage.

  Thus, when a lot of prize balls based on the winnings are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is filled with the prize balls, and finally reaches the upper plate communication port and the prize balls continue to be paid out, Then, it is guided to the surplus ball passage and then discharged to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 via the connecting rod 392. When the award ball continues to be paid out, the surplus ball receiving tray 4 is also full, but when it reaches the full tank detection lever portion provided on one side wall of the surplus ball passage, the full tank detection lever is pressed. Then, the full tank switch 158 (see FIG. 4) is turned ON, and the driving of the payout motor 115 of the ball payout device 154 is stopped to disable the payout operation of the prize balls and the rental balls. At this time, driving of a launch motor 601 described later of the hitting ball launcher 130 is not stopped, but may be stopped.

  The power supply board box 122 accommodates a power supply board 910 that generates a plurality of power supplies having different voltages. The power supply board 910 includes a power switch 914 for turning on and off the entire pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main board 120, payout control board 98, and production control board 90. A clear switch 921 (see also FIG. 7), a tube fuse, and the like are mounted for clearing the data stored in the backup RAM provided in FIG. The power supply board 910 is mounted with a power connector to which the power cord 117 is connected. The voltage supplied by the power cord 117 is a voltage of AC24V, and the plurality of voltages generated by the power supply board 910 are four types of DC30V, DC24V, DC12V, and DC5V. (However, AC 24V is also supplied to other boards.) Further, the power supply board 910 is not supplied with drive power to the CPUs of the main board 120, the payout control board 98, and the effect control board 90. In order to back up (hold) the stored contents of the RAM of each of the boards 120, 98, 90, backup power is supplied to each of the boards 120, 98, 90. The main board 120 is configured to perform a backup process by outputting a power-off signal from the power board 910. Note that the payout control board 98 and the effect control board 90 are similarly backed up. The backup processing on the main board 120, the payout control board 98, and the effect control board 90 will be described in detail later.

  On the front side of the mechanism plate main body 141 of the lower right component part (the side in contact with the game board 6), a winning ball guiding path (not shown) for guiding a winning ball and an out ball path (not shown) for guiding an out ball. And are formed. Above the winning ball guiding passage is a winning ball drop entrance (not shown), which receives the winning ball released from the winning ball guiding cover body 82, and the received winning ball is the winning ball. The guide passage guides to one side, leads from the communication port (not shown) formed in the mechanism plate main body 141 to the back side of the mechanism plate main body 141, and further from the communication port to the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage (illustration) (Omitted). The downstream portion of the ball removal passage is bent in an inverted L shape along the outer peripheral edge of the lower right component, and is joined to the right side of the surplus ball passage formed on the substantially rear side of the lower component. It finally comes to join the passage. Accordingly, the winning ball received from the winning ball dropping entrance is guided to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the winning ball guiding passage, the communication port, the downstream portion of the ball discharging passage, and the confluence discharging passage. .

  The out ball taken in from the out port 26 of the game board 6 is guided to an out ball discharge passage (not shown) engraved on the back surface of the game board 6, and further, a plate-like portion below the game board storage frame portion. It is led to the above-mentioned out ball passage through an out ball communication port (not shown) formed in the above, and is led to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the communication port and the junction discharge passage. In other words, the above-described merged discharge passage is configured to join all of the ball from the downstream portion of the ball removal passage, the out ball from the out ball passage, and the winning ball from the winning ball guide passage to guide the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside. It is.

  FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the configuration of the operation key 190. The operation key 190 includes a determination key 191, an upward key 192, and a downward key 193 constituted by a push type detection switch. The enter key 191, the up direction key 192, and the down direction key 193 are operated when the operation screen as described later is displayed on the first decoration change display portion 8k or the second decoration change display portion 9k. It becomes effective. When the upward key 192 is operated, a display is performed in which the position of the operation button selected and displayed among the plurality of operation buttons displayed as an image on the operation screen is moved upward on the screen. Further, when the down key 193 is operated, a display is performed in which the position of the operation button selected and displayed among the plurality of operation buttons displayed as an image on the operation screen is moved downward on the screen. When the enter key 191 is operated, it is determined that the operation button selected and displayed among the plurality of operation buttons displayed as an image on the operation screen is actually operated. In addition, when the determination key 191 is operated when the decorative symbol is not variably displayed on the first decorative variation display portion 8k or the second decorative variation display portion 9k, an operation screen may be displayed.

  As described above, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Next, a circuit configuration that is wire-connected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the main board 120, various control boards, and electrical components.

  A game control microcomputer 99 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 120. A game control microcomputer 99 (also referred to as game control means) includes a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that serves as a work memory, a CPU 56 that controls the progress of the game in accordance with the program, and An I / O port unit 50 that transmits a control signal (command) to the effect control board 90 or the like is included. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and RAM 55 are built in the CPU 56. That is, the CPU 56 is a one-chip microcomputer. In addition, the CPU 56 used in this embodiment includes a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) used for generating a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be set to interrupt prohibition by software, And an interrupt terminal (INT terminal) used to generate an external interrupt (external interrupt; maskable interrupt that can be disabled by software). However, this embodiment does not use non-maskable interrupts and external interrupts. Therefore, the NMI terminal and the INT terminal are pulled up to VCC (+5 V) through resistors. Therefore, the input level of the NMI terminal and the INT terminal is always high, and the input level of the NMI terminal and the INT terminal falls from the high level to the low level due to noise or the like as compared with the case where the terminal is open. The possibility of becoming a state is reduced. Since CPU 56 executes control according to a program stored in ROM 54, hereinafter, CPU 56 executes (or performs processing), specifically, CPU 56 executes control according to a program. It is to be. The same applies to CPUs mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 120. The game control microcomputer 99 used in this embodiment is a peripheral circuit such as the CPU 56, ROM 54, RAM 55, and I / O port unit 50 mounted on the main board 120.

  On the main board 120, a switch circuit 32, a solenoid circuit 33, an LED drive circuit 70, and an information output circuit 34 are mounted. The switch circuit 32 includes a first gate switch 61, a first start port switch 62, a first count switch 63, a first V winning switch 64, a second gate switch 66, a second start port switch 67, a second count switch 68, Signals from various detection means such as a 2V winning switch 69, a normal winning switch (not shown), and a count switch short circuit signal (not shown) are given to the game control microcomputer 99.

  The solenoid circuit 33 includes a solenoid 71 that opens and closes the first variable winning device 15, a solenoid 72 that opens and closes the first special variable winning device 20, a solenoid 73 that drives a path switching member in the first big winning port 21, and a second variable. A solenoid 74 for opening / closing the winning device 17, a solenoid 75 for opening / closing the second special variable winning device 22, a solenoid 76 for driving a path switching member in the second large winning port 23, and the like from the game control microcomputer 99. Drive according to the command. The LED drive circuit 70 is responsive to a control signal from the game control microcomputer 99 to display a first special symbol display 8, a second special symbol display 9, a first special symbol hold storage display 10, and a second special symbol. Drive signals are output to the hold memory display 11, the first normal symbol display 12, the second normal symbol display 13, the first normal symbol hold storage display 18, and the second normal symbol hold storage display 19, respectively. To do. The information output circuit 34 outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer in accordance with the data given from the game control microcomputer 99.

  The main board 120 is formed with a circuit for performing display control for deriving and displaying a display result after starting the variable display in each of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9. The game control microcomputer 99 performs display control by outputting a drive signal to each of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 according to the program. Thus, a control board for a special symbol display equipped with a driver circuit and a microcomputer is provided between the main board 120 and the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9. Compared with the case where the display control of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 is performed by the control board or the like based on the command signal, the result of the big hit determination can be surely displayed.

  The main board 120 has a circuit for notifying the number of numerical data stored in the corresponding reserved memory buffer in each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 10 and the second special symbol reserved memory display 11. Is formed. The game control microcomputer 99 outputs a drive signal corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory buffer to each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 10 and the second special symbol reserved memory display 11 in accordance with the program, and performs control. Do.

  The main board 120 is formed with a circuit for performing display control for deriving and displaying the display result after starting the variable display in each of the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13. . The game control microcomputer 99 performs display control by outputting a drive signal to each of the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13 according to the program. Thus, a control board for a normal symbol display equipped with a driver circuit and a microcomputer is provided between the main board 120 and the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13. Compared with the case where the display control of the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13 is performed by the control board or the like based on the command signal, the result of the normal symbol hit determination can be surely displayed. it can.

  In addition, the main board 120 is notified of the number of numerical data stored in the corresponding reserved storage buffer in each of the first normal symbol reserved storage display 18 and the second normal symbol reserved storage display 19. This circuit is formed. In accordance with the program, the game control microcomputer 99 outputs a drive signal corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory buffer to each of the first ordinary symbol reserved memory display 18 and the second ordinary symbol reserved memory display 19 for control. Do.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The At least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control microcomputer 99 is stored in the backup RAM. Note that the data corresponding to the control state of the game control microcomputer 99 is necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. It is data. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  The main board 120 includes a clear signal indicating that the clear switch 921 for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated from the power supply board 910, and a power-off indicating that the power supply voltage has decreased to a predetermined value or less. A system reset signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a reset signal) used as a signal and a game control permission signal (a signal for making the CPU operable) to the game control microcomputer 99 is input via the input circuit 121. Entered. Such a clear signal, a power-off signal, and a reset signal are input from the input circuit 121 to the game control microcomputer 99 via the I / O port unit 50.

  Signals from the full switch 158 and the ball break switch 157 are input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98. It should be noted that the signal from the ball break switch 157 may be configured not to be input to the main board 120. Similarly, the signal from the full tank switch 158 may be configured not to be input to the main board 120. Further, a signal from the payout number counting switch 116 mounted on the ball payout device 154 is input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 99 follows the program to produce an effect control command as a control signal for controlling the display state of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k as the game progresses. Is output to the effect control board 90 via the peripheral command relay base 57. This effect control command is also used as a control signal for instructing control (lamp control) of a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 40 and a control signal for controlling sound (voice control) output from the speaker 27. It is done. The effect control command includes a first effect control command for designating display of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and a second effect control command for designating display of the second decoration variation display unit 9k. Further, the game control microcomputer 99 outputs various game information to the board external terminal board 96 described above.

  The effect control board 90 includes a CPU (effect control CPU 118a shown in FIG. 6), a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown), an I / O port section ((input ports 668 and 669 shown in FIG. 6, input / output). (Embodiment control microcomputer 118, also referred to as an effect control means) is mounted, which includes an effect control microcomputer 118 composed of a port 671 and the like. In accordance with the type of the effect control command input from the board 120, the display control of the decorative design in each of the first decorative variation display unit 8k and the second decorative variation display unit 9k is performed, and the display state of the decorative design is supported. In the production mode determined as described above, light emission control using light emitting means such as various lamps and sound control using the speaker 27 are performed.

  The production control microcomputer 118 operates in accordance with a program stored in the ROM. When receiving the effect control command from the main board 120, the effect control microcomputer 118 receives the effect control command received from the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k in accordance with the received effect control command. Production control including display control, lamp control, and sound control of the decoration variation display unit specified in (1) is performed. Specifically, the display control of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k is performed by VDPs 119a and 119b (see FIG. 6) having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function. Do.

  The effect control board 90 exchanges information signals with the voice frame lamp board 92 in order to perform light emission control and sound control corresponding to the effect indicated by the received effect control command. For example, the effect control board 90 outputs a lamp control command to the voice frame lamp board 92 in order to drive various lamps, and outputs a voice control command to the voice frame lamp board 92 in order to control a game sound from the speaker 27. To do.

  The voice frame lamp board 92 is based on the lamp control command and the voice control command input from the effect control board 90, such as a gaming state (variation pattern, normal gaming state or probability fluctuation state, whether a fluctuation display is in progress, etc. In accordance with the gaming state), a driving signal is output to each of the gaming effect lamp 40 and the speaker 27 to control the lighting of the gaming effect lamp 40 and to control the gaming sound from the speaker 27. The voice frame lamp board 92 outputs a drive signal to the lamp driver board 93 for driving the decorative lamp 25 based on the lamp control command input from the effect control board 90, and the game is played through the lamp driver board 93. Lighting control of the decoration lamp 25 attached to the panel 6 is performed.

  Further, operation keys 190 (decision key 191, upward key 192, and downward key 193) and launch ball sensor 194 are connected to effect control board 90.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 collects data for displaying the game history information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a specific command described later among the received effect control commands. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays various types of information with managers such as store staff of the game shop (game hall) where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed as the use target person. The game store information screen, which is an image to be displayed, is displayed on either the first decoration fluctuation display section 8k or the second decoration fluctuation display section 9k. The game shop information screen corresponds to an operation screen on which the operation of the operation key 190 is valid.

  When the game store information screen is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs processing for managing the aforementioned game history information based on an operation signal output in response to an operation of the operation key 190 by a store clerk or the like. The predetermined process is executed. Further, in a normal state in which the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k are capable of variably displaying the decoration symbol, based on the operation signal output in response to the operation of the operation key 190 by the player. Then, a player information screen, which is an image for displaying various types of information with the player as a user, is displayed on either the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration variation display portion 9k. The player information screen corresponds to an operation screen on which the operation of the operation key 190 is valid. When the player information screen is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the aforementioned game history information based on the operation signal output in response to the operation of the operation key 190 by the player, etc. The predetermined process is executed.

  Further, the payout control board 98 outputs a payout stop signal to the ball payout device 154 based on the full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 to stop the driving of the payout motor 115. The full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98. When a full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 120, a full tank signal is output from the main board 120 to the audio frame lamp board 92 to display and drive a predetermined lamp or LED. May be notified. Further, since the full tank signal from the full switch 158 is output to the payout control board 98, for example, an error indicator on the payout control board 98 or the like may be notified.

  Also, switches (first and first) for detecting winning balls including the first and second start opening switches 62 and 67, the first and second count switches 63 and 68, and the first and second V winning switches 64 and 69. The game control microcomputer 99 outputs a prize ball control signal (payout control command) from the main board 120 to the payout control board 98 based on the input signals from the two gate switches 61 and 66). In the payout control board 98, the number of prize balls based on the prize ball control signal from the main board 120 is added to the number of unpaid, and the ball payout device 154 is driven to pay out the prize balls for the number of unpaid out. . Further, based on the input signal from the payout number count switch 116, the payout control board 98 subtracts the payout number from the unpaid number. Also, the payout control board 98 performs control to display and notify the prize ball LED 51 based on the input of the prize ball control signal from the main board 120.

  Further, the payout control board 98 outputs a payout stop signal to the ball payout device 154 based on the ball shortage switch signal from the ball shortage switch 157 and performs control to stop driving of the payout motor 115. At that time, the payout control board 98 performs control to display and notify the ball-cut LED 52 in a predetermined manner.

  When either the full tank switch 158 or the ball break switch 157 is turned ON, a payout stop signal (payout stop command) is output from the payout control board 98 so that the payout of a prize ball or the like is not performed. If both switches 158 and 157 are OFF, a payout enable signal (payout stop release command) may be output. In addition, when there is an unpaid out in place of the prize ball LED 51, an unpaid out notification lamp or the like that lights up may be provided.

  Only the switch input for controlling the game operation and the switch input for controlling the payout operation of the prize ball are input to the main board 120, and the relationship between the main board 120 and other control boards excluding the payout control board 98 In FIG. 2, the communication relationship is one-way from the main board 120 to another control board. For this reason, there is an advantage that an illegal processing program is incorporated into another control board and cannot be executed even if an illegal process is performed on the main board 120, and a part of the control of the main board 120 is transferred to another control board. Since the control board is in charge, the burden on the main board 120 can be reduced and the inspection of the main board 120 can be facilitated.

  Further, the payout control board 98 includes signals from the payout sensor board 114, the payout motor 115, and the payout number count switch 116 mounted on the ball payout device 154, and the full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 as described above. Or, a ball break signal from the ball break switch 157 is input. The payout sensor board 114 is a board provided with a payout motor position sensor, which is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 115. By this payout motor position sensor, the pachinko gaming machine In order to reliably perform one payout operation, the rotational position of the payout motor 115 (more precisely, the stop position of the ball payout member as the rotating member) can be detected. From the payout sensor board 114, a detection signal of the payout motor position sensor is output.

  Further, the payout control board 98 is connected to an interface board 103 that relays signals from the card unit device 731 and the balance display board 104, and a ball rental switch 36 and a return switch 37 mounted on the balance display board 104. And various types of information are input from the card unit device 731. Further, as described above, a prize ball control signal is input to the payout control board 98 from the main board 120. Of the above-described input signals, the payout control board 98 is based on the input signal from the payout sensor board 114 and the stop position of the payout motor 115 in the lending and winning ball payout operation, that is, the ball payout member of the ball payout device 154. It is possible to accurately control the stop position and detect whether or not the ball dispensing member is operating. Further, based on an input signal from the payout number count switch 116, the payout control board 98 drives and controls the payout motor 115 so as to pay out the correct payout numbers of the rented and winning balls, and the frame external terminal plate 102. Information on the number of balls rented (25 pulses for 100 yen is 1 pulse). Note that lending is performed by transmitting and receiving various signals between the payout control board 98 and the card unit device 731 via the interface board 103 and driving the ball payout device 154.

  Furthermore, the payout control board 98 executes a prize ball payout operation or pays out a prize ball based on a prize ball control signal from the main board 120, a ball dead signal and a full tank signal directly inputted from the switch, and the like. The operation is stopped and executed. Note that the input signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full tank switch 158 connected to the frame external terminal board 102 are output to the external hall management computer or the like as ball break information or full tank information.

  In the hit ball launching device 130 described above, the launch board 107 on which a circuit for driving the launch motor 601 is mounted is provided. Signals from the touch sensor and the single firing switch described above are transmitted from the operation handle 5 to the firing substrate 107. Then, in response to the operation of the operation handle 5 by the player, a drive signal for driving the firing motor 601 is output from the firing substrate 107 to the firing motor 601. The firing motor 601 is driven in accordance with a drive signal from the firing substrate 107. In the firing substrate 107, when the signal from the touch sensor indicates an off state, the driving of the firing motor 601 is stopped.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 98 and the ball payout device 154. As shown in FIG. 5, the payout control board 98 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 660 including an payout control CPU 659 (an example of an electric component control microcomputer, also referred to as payout control means). In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 660 is a one-chip microcomputer and has a built-in RAM for storing at least the number of payouts. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 660. At least a part of the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 660 is backed up by a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 910. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all RAM areas are backed up. Therefore, even when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stored contents of the RAM are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full tank switch 158 are input to the I / O port 661d of the payout control board 98 via the sunpack relay board 101. Further, the sunpack relay board 101 is connected to the frame external terminal board 102 by a connector. The frame external terminal plate 102 includes a connector for outputting the number of prize balls as a connector for connecting a signal line between the outside (for example, a management computer) and the pachinko gaming machine 1, and first and second doors. Connectors for outputting signals from the open switches 111 and 112 are provided as external connection terminals.

  The detection signals from the payout number count switch 116 and the payout sensor board 114 mounted on the ball payout device 154 are input to the I / O port 661c of the payout control board 98 via the payout relay board 113. The payout control microcomputer 660 performs a process of subtracting the unpaid number stored in the RAM based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a signal for driving the payout motor 115 via the payout relay board 113 when there is an unpaid number. In addition, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a payout stop signal from the I / O port 661c to the payout relay board 113 when a signal indicating that the ball is full or full is input to the I / O port 661d. The payout relay board 113 stops the drive of the payout motor 115 when receiving the payout stop signal.

  The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a ball break signal to the plastic frame relay board 108 via the I / O port 661b when a signal indicating ball break is input to the I / O port 661d. The plastic frame relay board 108 performs control to turn on the ball break LED 52 based on the ball break signal. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a prize ball signal to the plastic frame relay board 108 via the I / O port 661b based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The plastic frame relay board 108 performs control to turn on the prize ball LED 51 based on the prize ball signal. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a firing stop signal to the plastic frame relay board 108 via the I / O port 661b when a signal indicating that the ball is full or full is input to the I / O port 661d. You may make it do. In this case, the plastic frame relay board 108 may output a firing motor disabling signal to the launch board 107 so that the launch motor 601 cannot be driven.

  Further, when a game ball is won at the winning opening, a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is output from the output circuit 662 of the main board 120 (turns on). The output circuit 662 outputs a payout start command (a payout start command) when the game control microcomputer 99 starts up (when the operation is started). The output circuit 662 receives an initialization command (initialization) for initializing the backup storage data in the RAM of the payout control board 98 when the game control microcomputer 99 is started up (when the operation is started). Command) is output. Further, the output circuit 662 outputs a recovery command (recovery command) indicating that the power supply has been recovered. When outputting a prize ball control signal, a payout start command, an initialization command, or a restoration command, a prize ball REQ signal (prize ball request signal) for instructing the taking-in is output (in an on state). Become).

  In this embodiment, the winning ball control signal, the payout activation command, the initialization command, and the recovery command are transmitted through the same signal line. The prize ball control signal, the payout start command, the initialization command, and the recovery command are configured by 5-bit data (binary 5-digit data) and are output by five signal lines. Note that the ON state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state in which the signal is significant, and turning on means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, the fact that the prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls and the prize ball REQ signal are in the ON state instructs the dispense control microcomputer 660 to recognize the number of prizes indicated by the prize ball control signal. Means that.

  The prize ball control signal, the payout start command, the initialization command, and the recovery command are input to the I / O port 661g via the input circuit 663A. The prize ball REQ signal is input to a maskable interrupt terminal (hereinafter also simply referred to as an interrupt terminal) of the payout control CPU 659. The payout control CPU 659 receives an award ball control signal via the I / O port 661g in an interrupt process based on the input of the award ball REQ signal to the interrupt terminal. Control is performed to drive the ball payout device 154 to pay out the game ball. A connection confirmation signal indicating that the main board 120 is connected is also output from the output circuit 662 of the main board 120.

  Further, when the payout control microcomputer 660 receives the prize ball control signal, it transmits a command acceptance signal to the main board 120. The command acceptance signal is transmitted to the main board 120 via the output port 661h of the payout control board 98 and the output circuit 663B. Then, in the main board 120, it is input to the game control microcomputer 99 via the input circuit 666 and the I / O port unit 50. In this embodiment, the command acceptance signal is transmitted when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 98 also supplies a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from the power supply board 910 and a payout control allowance signal for the payout control microcomputer 660 (the CPU is made operable). A reset signal used as a signal for input) is input to the input port 661a.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 664 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 661f. A detection signal from the error release switch 665 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 661e of the payout control board 98. The error cancel switch 665 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit device 731 installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the card unit device 731 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board 103 is connected with a power display LED 105, a ball lending display LED 106, a ball lending switch 36, and a return switch 37 provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 36 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 37 has been operated are given from the interface board 103 to the card unit device 731 according to the player's operation. It is done. The card unit device 731 receives a card balance display signal and a ball lending display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card from the card unit device 731. Between the card unit device 731 and the payout control board 98, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 661i and the output port 661j. An interface board 103 is interposed between the card unit device 731 and the payout control board 98. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit device 731 and the payout control board 98 via the interface board 103 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, the VL signal is either a launch-permitted state in which launching is permitted with respect to the launch of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 130 or a launch-inhibited state in which launching of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 130 is prohibited. Used to select the state. The VL signal is transmitted from the output port 661k to the launch board 107 via the plastic frame relay board 108.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit device 731. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 660 determines whether the card unit device 731 is connected or not based on the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received by the card unit device 731, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 98. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 98.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 660 raises the EXS signal for the card unit device 731 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit device 731, drives the payout motor 115 to play a predetermined number of rental balls. Pay to the person. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 660 causes the EXS signal to the card unit device 731 to fall. Thereafter, when the BRDY signal from the card unit device 731 is not in the ON state, when a prize ball control signal is received from the game control microcomputer 99, prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit device 731 is supplied from the payout control board 98. That is, the power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit device 731 is performed via the payout control board 98 and the interface board 103. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit device 731 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit device 731 arranged in the interface board 103, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is applied to the card unit device 731. It is prevented from being supplied.

  In the firing board 107, a detection signal from the touch ring 110 (hereinafter referred to as a touch sensor detection signal), a detection signal from the single firing switch 109 (hereinafter referred to as a single firing switch detection signal), and an interface from the card unit device 731. A VL signal transmitted via the board 103 and the payout control board 98 is input. On the launch board 107, a launch motor drive circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the launch motor 601 is mounted. The firing motor drive circuit permits firing by outputting a drive signal when the touch sensor detection signal or the single firing switch detection signal is on and the VL signal is on.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the effect control board 90 and the voice frame lamp board 92. As shown in FIG. In the effect control board 90, the effect control CPU 118a in the effect control microcomputer 118 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown) and is transmitted from the main board 120 via the peripheral command relay board 57. An effect control command is received via the peripheral command relay board 57, the input driver 667, and the input port 668 in response to the capture signal (effect control INT signal).

  The effect control microcomputer 118 displays on the VDP (video display processor) 119a having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function based on the effect control command, on the first decoration variation display unit 8k using an LCD. Let control take place. Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 causes the VDP 119b to perform display control of the second decoration variation display unit 9k using the LCD based on the effect control command. VDP is sometimes called GCL (Graphic Controller LSI).

  The effect control CPU 118a operates in accordance with a program stored in the effect control board ROM. When the effect control command is received from the main board 120, the change display unit (first decoration) corresponding to the received command is received according to the received effect control command. Display control of the fluctuation display part 8k or the second decoration fluctuation display part 9k) is performed. Specifically, display control of the variable display unit is performed by VDP 119a and VDP 119b. The effect control CPU 118a reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, specifically, a person, a monster, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like. It is for storing in advance.

  Then, the effect control CPU 118a outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 119a and VDP 119b. Each VDP operates based on the data input from the effect control CPU 118a. In this embodiment, two VDPs 119a and 119b are mounted on the effect control board 90. When there are three variable display units, three VDPs are mounted. That is, the number of VDPs corresponding to the number of variable display units is mounted on the effect control board 90. Each of the VDPs 119a and 119b has a two-dimensional address space independent of the effect control CPU 118a, and maps the first VRAM and the second VRAM (both not shown). In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs display control of several fluctuation | variation display parts with one VDP. For example, it is good also as a structure provided with one VDP which performs display control of both the 1st decoration fluctuation display part 8k and the 2nd decoration fluctuation display part 9k.

  The VDP 119a or the VDP 119b generates image data to be displayed on the variation display unit (the first decoration variation display unit 8k or the second decoration variation display unit 9k) according to the command received according to the character image data. The VDP 119a develops the generated image data in the first VRAM, and the VDP 119b develops the generated image data in the second VRAM. The first RAM is a frame buffer memory for expanding the image data generated by the VDP 119a, and the second VRAM is a frame buffer memory for expanding the image data generated by the VDP 119b. Then, such image data is output to a variation display unit (first decoration variation display unit 8k or second decoration variation display unit 9k) corresponding to the received command.

  The peripheral command relay board 57 allows signals (effect control signal and effect control INT signal constituting the effect control command) input from the main board 120 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 90 (effect control board). A unidirectional circuit 57a is mounted as signal input blocking means (which does not allow signals to pass in the direction from 90 to the main board 120). As the unidirectional circuit 57a, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, the unidirectional circuit 57 a is provided for each signal line passing through the peripheral command relay board 57. A signal from the effect control board 90, a signal input to the effect control board 90 (an operation signal from the operation key 190 and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194), and a voice frame lamp board 92 connected to the effect control board 90 A signal from (a board not connected to the main board 120 is also referred to as a peripheral board) is not transmitted to the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120 due to the presence of the peripheral command relay board 57. Therefore, the signal input path from the outside to the game control microcomputer 99 is limited, and the possibility of an illegal act of sending an illegal signal to the game control microcomputer 99 can be reduced. Furthermore, when the peripheral command relay board 57 is mounted in such a manner that the back surface thereof can be visually recognized, the back surface of the peripheral command relay board 57 can be easily visually recognized. It is possible to easily find out that an illegal act of illegally inputting a signal to the microcomputer 99 has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the unidirectional circuit 57a is provided on the peripheral command relay board 57 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the unidirectional circuit 57a may be provided on the main board 120. Further, the effect control board 90 may be provided. That is, the unidirectional circuit 57a may be configured to be provided at a place where an illegal signal can be prevented from being input to the game control microcomputer 99.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 receives an operation signal from the operation key 190 (191, 192, 193) and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194 via the input port 669.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs a voice control command for controlling the voice emitted from the speaker 27 to the voice frame lamp board 92 via the input / output port 671, the game effect lamp 40, and the decoration lamp 25. And a lamp control command for controlling the lighting state of.

  In the voice frame lamp board 92, the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a including the CPU, ROM and RAM is connected to the speaker 27 via the voice driver circuit 673 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the voice control command. To control. The voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a controls the game effect lamp 40 via the frame lamp driver circuit 672 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the lamp control command. Further, the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a sends a drive signal for controlling the decoration lamp 25 via the bus driver 674 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the lamp control command. To 93.

  In the lamp driver board 93, the decoration lamp 25 is controlled via the output port 676 and the decoration lamp driver circuit 677 based on the drive signal output from the audio frame lamp board 92 and input from the bus driver 675. The lamp driver board 93 is further provided with an expansion port 678 so that other effect devices can be driven.

  The lamp control command and the voice control command in the present embodiment are two-way communication (a response signal is transmitted from the command receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control microcomputer 118 and the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a. Communication).

  The reset signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92 a mounted on the voice frame lamp board 92. The reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the audio frame lamp board 92 and further via the input / output port 671 mounted on the effect control board 90. The power-off signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the audio frame lamp board 92 and further via the input / output port 671 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In addition, at least a part of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 118 is backed up by a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 910. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a part of the RAM area (hereinafter referred to as a backup area) is backed up. Therefore, even when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the production control microcomputer 118 for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The stored contents of the RAM backup area are saved. Note that the entire RAM area of the effect control microcomputer 118 may be backed up by a backup power source.

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 910 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the power supply substrate 910. The power supply board 910 is provided with a power switch 914 for executing or shutting off the power supply to each electric component control board and mechanism parts in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The power switch 914 may be provided outside the power supply board 910 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the power switch 914 is in a closed state (on state), AC power (AC 24 V) is applied to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 911. The transformer 911 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the inside of the power supply board 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. A varistor 918 as an overvoltage protection circuit is installed on the input side of the transformer 911.

  The power supply board 910 is installed independently of the electric component control board (the main board 120, the payout control board 98, the effect control board 90, etc.), and generates a voltage used by each board and the mechanical parts in the pachinko gaming machine 1. . In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VLP (DC + 24V), VDD (DC + 12V) and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. Further, a capacitor 916 serving as a storage holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM, is charged from DC + 5V (VCC), that is, a power supply line for driving an IC or the like on each substrate. Further, a backflow prevention diode 917 is inserted between the +5 V line and the backup +5 V (VBB) line. Note that VSL is generated by rectifying and boosting AC 24 V with a rectifying element in the rectifying and smoothing circuit 915. VSL is a solenoid driving power source. VLP is a lamp lighting voltage, and is generated by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier element in the rectifier circuit 912.

  A DC-DC converter 913 serving as a power supply voltage generation unit has one or a plurality of regulator ICs (two regulator ICs 924A and 924B are shown in FIG. 7), and generates VDD and VCC based on VSL. Relatively large capacitors 923A and 923B are connected to the input sides of the regulator ICs (switching regulators) 924A and 924B. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is stopped, the direct current voltages such as VSL, VDD, VCC, etc., decrease relatively slowly.

  As shown in FIG. 7, AC24V output from the transformer 911 is supplied to the connector 922B as it is. The VLP is supplied to the connector 922C. VCC, VDD and VSL are supplied to connectors 922A, 922B and 922C.

  The cable connected to the connector 922A is connected to the main board 120. The cable connected to the connector 922B is connected to the payout control board 98. The cable connected to the connector 922C is connected to the audio frame lamp board 92. Then, each voltage supplied from the connector 922C is supplied to the effect control board 90 and the lamp driver board 93 via the voice frame lamp board 92. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, data is backed up on each of the main board 120, the payout control board 98, and the effect control board 90. Therefore, VBB is also supplied to the connectors 922A, 922B, and 922C. Here, VBB from 922C is supplied to the effect control board 90 via the voice frame lamp board 92.

  In addition, a clear switch 921 having a push button structure is mounted on the power supply board 910. When the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level (on state) clear signal is output and transmitted to the main board 120 via the connector 922A. If the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level (off state) signal is output. The clear switch 921 may have a configuration other than the push button structure. Further, in the gaming machine, the clear switch 921 may be provided in other places as long as it is a board other than the power supply board 910 such as the payout control board 98 or the rear side of the gaming machine.

  Further, the power supply board 910 generates a reset signal as a system reset signal for the microcomputer mounted on the electric component control board, and outputs a power-off signal. An output driver circuit 925 that amplifies the reset signal and outputs it to the connectors 922A, 922B, and 922C, and amplifies the power-off signal and outputs it to the connector 922A and the connector 922B is mounted. The reset signal is used as an operation stop signal that stops (inhibits) the operation of the microcomputer at the reset level, and is used as an operable signal that enables the operation of the microcomputer when the reset level is reached. In the present embodiment, a reset signal via the audio frame lamp board 92 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118. However, the input pattern of the system reset signal to the production control microcomputer 118 is not limited to this. For example, an input pattern in which a system reset signal is input via the main board 120 or the payout control board 98 may be used.

  The power monitoring circuit 920 is a circuit that realizes a voltage drop monitoring unit that outputs a power-off signal and a reset signal generation unit that generates a system reset signal. Note that the voltage drop monitoring unit and the reset signal generation unit may be configured by separate circuits. A commercially available power failure monitoring reset module IC can be used as the power monitoring circuit 920. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal when a period during which a predetermined voltage (for example, + 24V) used in the gaming machine has become a predetermined value (for example, + 5V) or less continues for a predetermined time (for example, 56 ms). . Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). The power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the system reset signal to a low level when, for example, VCC becomes +4.5 V or less.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 920 is not limited to determining whether or not the voltage has become a predetermined value or less by determining whether or not the period during which the voltage has become the predetermined value or less has continued for a predetermined time or more. For example, it may be determined whether or not the voltage has become a predetermined value or less by detecting a pulse obtained using a general full-wave rectifier circuit including a diode circuit. For example, among pulses obtained by full-wave rectification of an AC wave by a full-wave rectifier circuit, a pulse whose amplitude is greater than or equal to a predetermined value is counted, and when the voltage is not counted for a predetermined period, You may judge that it became.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level on condition that a predetermined period has elapsed since the power-off signal was output (set to a low level). . During the predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 99 mounted on the main board 120, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98, and the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 90. This is a sufficient time for the computer 118 to execute the power-off process described later. That is, after the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal as a voltage drop signal, the game control microcomputer 99, the payout control microcomputer 660, and the effect control microcomputer 118 execute a power-off process. After completion, an operation stop signal (reset signal low level) is output. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and VCC exceeds + 4.5V, for example, the system reset signal is set to the high level. The system reset signal is set to a high level on the condition that a predetermined period has passed. Therefore, when the microcomputer mounted on each electrical component control board (including the main board 120) starts control according to the program in response to the system reset signal becoming high level, the power-off signal is always turned off. It is in a state.

  The power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the payout control microcomputer 660 via the input port 661a on the payout control board 98 (see FIG. 5). That is, the payout control microcomputer 660 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the input port 661a. In the main board 120, the power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input from the input circuit 121 to the game control microcomputer 99 via the I / O port unit 50 (see FIG. 4). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 99 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the I / O port unit 50. In the effect control board 90, the power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the input / output port 671 (see FIG. 6). That is, the production control microcomputer 118 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the input / output port 671.

  On the other hand, the reset signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer 660 via the input port 661a (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the payout control microcomputer 660 can confirm the timing for setting the payout control operation execution state and the payout control operation stop state by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal. The reset signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input from the input circuit 121 to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 99 via the I / O port unit 50 (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the game control microcomputer 99 can confirm the timing for setting the execution state of the game control operation and the timing for stopping the game control operation by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal. The reset signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the effect control microcomputer 118 via the input / output port 671 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the production control microcomputer 118 can confirm the timing for setting the payout control operation to be executed and the timing for setting the payout control operation to be stopped by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 monitors the output of a power supply having a predetermined potential, and detects a voltage from the outside of the gaming machine (this is a detection condition related to stopping the supply of power supplied to the gaming machine from the outside). In the embodiment, it is used that a predetermined DC voltage created from AC 24 V) is equal to or lower than a predetermined value. However, the detection condition is not limited to this, and if it is possible to detect that power from the outside is interrupted, Other conditions may be used. For example, the AC wave itself can be monitored to detect that the AC wave has been interrupted, or the AC wave can be detected by monitoring the digitized AC signal and the digital signal has become flat. May be used as a detection condition.

  Next, a random counter for generating a random number used for control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random counters used by the game control microcomputer 99 for game control. FIG. 8 shows eight types of random counters, random counters R1 to R8, as an example of the random counter.

  R1 is a jackpot for generating a random number used to randomly determine in advance whether or not to generate a jackpot state for each variable display of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 This is a random counter for determination, and is configured to count up from “0”, count up to the upper limit “658”, and count up from “0” again. This R1 is added and updated by 1 every 2 msec. When a valid start winning is detected by the first start opening switch 62 or the second start opening switch 67, a random number of this R1 is extracted accordingly, and the first start winning storage data or the second start winning storage data. Is stored in the RAM 55. And about each of the 1st special symbol display 8 and the 2nd special symbol display 9, the extraction value memorize | stored in RAM55 in that way is the stage before starting the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value. In this determination, if they match, it is decided to generate a big hit by using the display result of the variable display as a combination of the big hit symbols, and the above-mentioned control of the big hit gaming state is performed. It is determined that the display result is out of play, and the gaming state does not change. In a normal probability state other than the probability variation state, the jackpot determination value is set to one numerical value, for example. In the probability variation state, the big hit judgment value is set to a plurality of numerical values (in this case, the big hit judgment value is set so that the numerical order is not adjacent to the big hit judgment value so as not to be biased). As a result, the probability of a big hit is improved as compared with the case of the non-probable change state.

  When R2 is determined in advance to generate a big hit by the big hit determination using R1, any type of big win symbol is included in the first special symbol display 8 (including the first decoration variation display portion 8k) or the first 2 is a random counter for generating random numbers used to randomly determine whether to display on the special symbol display 9 (including the second decoration variation display unit 9k). R2 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “9” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 2 msec.

  In the present embodiment, when the random number extracted from R2 is an odd number, any one of “3, 5, 7” in the first special symbol display 8 is an odd symbol in the first decoration variation display unit 8k. The double-eyed eye according to any of the above is determined as the display result. When these display results are derived and displayed, they are controlled to a probable change state after the big hit is completed. On the other hand, when the random number extracted from R2 is an even number, any one of “1, 9” in the first special symbol display 8 is either “0” or an even symbol in the second decoration variation display portion 9k. The double-eyed eyes are determined as display results. When these display results are derived and displayed, a big hit occurs. In this way, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit by the big hit symbol, R2 determines whether to control to the probability variation state (probability variation start determination). It is also a random counter for generating a random number used for.

  R3 is a detachable symbol determination for generating a random number used to randomly determine in advance a stop symbol in the display result that is out of place for each of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9. It is a random counter for. R3 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “9” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”. Added and updated.

  When it is determined that the winning symbol in this embodiment is not controlled by jackpot using R1, according to the extracted value of the random counter R3 from the missing symbol (“0, 2, 4, 6, 8”). It is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when any one of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” is determined as the symbol of the first special symbol display 8 using R3, the first decoration variation display unit 8k is sloppy. Control is performed so that the out-of-eye symbols are derived and displayed. When any one of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” is determined as the symbol of the second special symbol indicator 9 using R3, a sloppy symbol that does not become a flat eye is derived in the second decoration variation display portion 9k. Controlled to be displayed.

  Here, the count-up operation in the remaining interrupt processing time performed in a predetermined random counter such as R3 will be described. The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 99 performs various types of control by executing periodic interrupt processing. For certain interrupt processing, after the interrupt processing is executed, the period until the next execution start of the interrupt processing is performed. Waiting for interrupt processing. Repeating the random counter addition update process using an infinite loop during the interrupt process surplus time waiting for such interrupt process is called counting up the interrupt process surplus time.

  R4 indicates a variation pattern which is a variation display pattern of the first special symbol display 8 (including the first decoration variation display unit 8k) and the second special symbol display 9 (including the second decoration variation display unit 9k). It is a numerical data updating means (random counter) for generating a random number used for determining at random. R4 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “99”, and then count up again from “0”, and once every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Added and updated. A variation pattern used for variation display is selected from a plurality of predetermined variation patterns based on the counter value extracted from the random counter R4 for variation pattern determination at a predetermined timing such as when the variation of the special symbol starts. It is determined. Each fluctuation pattern has a predetermined fluctuation display time (the time from the start of fluctuation display until the display result is derived and displayed, also called the fluctuation time). The variable display time is selected and determined.

  R5 is out of the above-mentioned jackpot determination for each of the first special symbol display 8 (including the first decoration variation display unit 8k) and the second special symbol display 9 (including the second decoration variation display unit 9k). When the determination is made, the reach display mode described above is formed during the variable display (hereinafter referred to as “reach out”) or the reach display mode is not formed (hereinafter referred to as “non-reach out”). This is a reach determination random counter for generating a random number used to determine whether or not. R5 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “39”, and then count up again from “0”, and add 1 every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Updated. Extracted from R5 at the stage before determining the symbols to be stopped by each of the first special symbol display 8, the first ornament variation display unit 8k, the second special symbol display 9, and the second ornament variation display unit 9k. It is determined whether or not the random number matches a predetermined reach determination value. If these values match, it is determined that the reach is out of control, and the reach state is controlled during the variable display where the display result is out of control. On the other hand, when these values coincide with each other, it is determined that the non-reach is out of control, and control is performed so as not to reach the reach state during the variable display in which the display result is out of place.

  R6 is a random counter for generating a random number used to randomly determine in advance whether or not to generate a hit for each variable display of the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13 It is. R6 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “11” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 2 msec. When a valid start passage is detected by the first gate switch 61 or the second gate switch 66, the R6 random number is extracted and stored in the RAM 55 as passage storage data. Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted value coincides with a predetermined hit determination value at a stage before starting the normal symbol variation display, and if it matches, the normal symbol hit may be generated. The above-described control is performed, and in the case of a mismatch, it is determined to be a deviation and the above-described control is performed.

  R7 is a random counter for generating a random number used to randomly determine the initial value of R1 described above. R7 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “658”, and then count up again from “0”, and once every 2 msec and the interrupt processing remainder time. Added and updated.

  R8 is a random counter for generating a random number used to randomly determine the initial value of R6 described above. R8 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “11” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”. Added and updated.

  FIG. 9 shows the first variation display unit (first special symbol display unit 8, first decoration variation display unit 8k) and the second variation display unit (second special symbol display unit 9, second decoration variation display unit 9k). It is a figure for demonstrating the data table which memorize | stored the judgment value used in order to select and determine a fluctuation pattern. In the data table according to the present embodiment, the determination values are distributed differently based on the result of the jackpot determination using R1 and the result of the reach determination using R5, and are stored in advance in the ROM 54 described above. .

  FIG. 9A is a data table that is looked up in the normal gaming state that is not controlled in any of the probability variation control mode and the short time control mode described above. When the determination result is a big hit determination result using R1 and the reach determination result using R5 is a non-reach shift determination that does not generate reach, the fluctuation used for the extracted value of R4 and the fluctuation display The relationship with the variation pattern selected and determined as a pattern is determined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the “normal A fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “50 to 99”, the “normal B fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, when the determination result is that the jackpot determination result using R1 is out of reach and the reach determination result using R5 is at the time of reach determination that causes reach, the extracted value of R4 and the fluctuation display are displayed. The relationship with the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern to be used is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 49”, the “reach A fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 79”, the “reach B fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “80 to 99”, the “reach C fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, when the determination result is a big hit determination when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern used for variation display is as follows. It is determined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 19”, the “big hit A fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “20 to 49”, the “big hit B fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, the “big hit C fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined.

  FIG. 9B is a data table that is looked up when the second state is controlled (shifted) to the time-shortening control mode described above. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern determined by looking up the data table of FIG. 9B is referred to as a shortened variation pattern.

  When the determination result is a big hit determination result using R1 and the reach determination result using R5 is a non-reach shift determination that does not generate reach, it is used for the extracted value of R4 and the fluctuation display. The relationship with the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern to be selected is determined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the “normal C fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 5 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, the “normal D fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 5 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, when the determination result is that the jackpot determination result using R1 is out of reach and the reach determination result using R5 is at the time of reach determination that causes reach, the extracted value of R4 and the fluctuation display are displayed. The relationship with the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern to be used is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 69”, the “reach D fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “70 to 99”, the “reach E fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, when the determination result is a big hit determination when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern used for variation display is as follows. It is determined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 29”, the “big hit D fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “30 to 99”, the “big hit E fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  FIG. 9C is a data table that is looked up when the first state is controlled (shifted) to the above-described probability variation control mode. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern determined by looking up the data table of FIG. 9C is referred to as a probability variation pattern. Further, when this probability variation pattern is determined, the variation time is shortened in the same manner as the shortened variation pattern described above.

  When the determination result is a big hit determination result using R1 and the reach determination result using R5 is a non-reach shift determination that does not generate reach, it is used for the extracted value of R4 and the fluctuation display. The relationship with the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern to be selected is determined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the “normal E fluctuation pattern during probability change” with a fluctuation display time of 5 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, the “normal F fluctuation pattern during probability change” with a fluctuation display time of 5 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, when the determination result is that the jackpot determination result using R1 is out of reach and the reach determination result using R5 is at the time of reach determination that causes reach, the extracted value of R4 and the fluctuation display are displayed. The relationship with the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern to be used is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 69”, the “probability change reach F fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “70 to 99”, the “probability change reach G fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, when the determination result is a big hit determination when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern used for variation display is as follows. It is determined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 29”, the “probable change big hit F fluctuation pattern” with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “30 to 99”, the “probable change big hit G fluctuation pattern” having a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  As will be described later, the variation pattern used for variation display in the present embodiment is the first variation display unit (first special symbol display 8, first decoration variation display unit 8k) or second variation display unit (first variation display unit). 2 When the variable display is started on the special symbol display 9 and the second decoration variation display unit 9k), S202 in the first special symbol process described later with reference to FIG. 21 and the same in the second special symbol process In step, the data table described in FIG. 9 is looked up and determined.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining various random counters used by the effect control microcomputer 118 for effect control. FIG. 10 shows a random counter RS and random counters RU-1 to RU-3 as examples of the random counter.

  RS is a random counter for effect content determination for generating a random number used for determining the effect content displayed in the first ornament variation display unit 8k or the second ornament variation display unit 9k, and “0”. It is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “232” which is the upper limit, and count up again from “0”. This RS is added and updated by 1 every 33 msec.

  RU-1 to RU-3 are for generating random numbers used to randomly determine a stop symbol of a decorative symbol in advance for each of the first decorative variation display unit 8k and the second decorative variation display unit 9k. It is a random counter for determining a decorative symbol stop symbol. RU-1 is used to determine the stop symbol of the left symbol. RU-2 is used to determine the stop symbol of the middle symbol. RU-3 is used to determine the stop symbol of the right symbol. For each of RU-1 to RU-3, RU-1 is updated every 33 msec, RU-2 is updated every carry of RU-1, and RU-3 is updated every carry of RU-2. Is updated from 0 to 9 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again.

  Note that the decorative symbols are changed (updated) and displayed in accordance with a predetermined symbol arrangement order. Each of the multiple types of decorative symbols is associated with numerical data for determining decorative symbol stop symbols, and it is determined that a reach state is determined to be out of reach in jackpot determination, and it is determined not to reach a reach state. In this case, symbols corresponding to random numbers extracted from each of RU-1 to RU-3 at a predetermined timing are determined as stop symbols for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, respectively. In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot judgment is a deviation, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the symbol of the jackpot accidentally, it is corrected so as to become a symbol of a loss (for example, the middle symbol is changed). Each symbol is determined by one symbol shift correction). In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot determination is a shift and the reach determination is determined by reach determination, the random number extracted at the above-described timing is extracted from RU-1. The symbol corresponding to the random number is determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right decorative symbols forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the numerical data corresponding to the counter value extracted from RU-2 is the stop symbol of the middle symbol As determined. Also in this case, when the combination of the big hit symbol is accidentally made, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the symbol so that it becomes an off symbol (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol). Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit and it is determined that the probability variation state is determined by determining the big hit symbol, the probability variation corresponding to the random number extracted from the RU-1 at a predetermined timing is determined. The jackpot symbol (odd ornament symbol) is determined as the stop symbol for each of the left, middle and right ornament symbols. If it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit and it is determined not to be in a probable variation state by the determination of the big hit symbol, the non-corresponding to the random number extracted from the RU-1 at a predetermined timing. A probable big hit symbol (0 or even symbol) is determined as a stop symbol for each of the left, middle and right decorative symbols.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect content selection table used by the effect control microcomputer 118 to select effect content. In the effect content selection table according to the present embodiment, determination values are assigned so as to be different based on a determination result command described later, and are stored in advance in a ROM mounted on the effect control board 90 described above.

  The effect content selection table is set in correspondence with whether or not it is in a certain change state. For example, when the determination result command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 at the low probability in the normal gaming state is the “reach pre-determination command”, refer to the low probability table in FIG. When the random number for display control RS extracted according to the distribution probability set in advance corresponding to the left column “reach pre-judgment command” is “0-209”, there is no notice effect, and when “210-229” Is the notice effect 1, and when “230 to 232”, the notice effect 2 is selected and determined as the contents of the effect. Each table will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 11A is a low probability table that is looked up when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability). In the low probability table, the range of extracted values of the display control random number RS for selecting “no notice effect”, “notice effect 1”, and “notice effect 2” is stored for each determination result command. For example, in the case where a determination result command indicating the “preliminary judgment command” is input to the effect control microcomputer 118, “no notice effect” is selected when the extracted value is within the range of “0 to 230” When the extracted value is within the range of “231 to 232”, “notice effect 1” is selected, but “notice effect 2” is not selected. When a determination result command indicating “non-probable big hit pre-determination command” is input to the production control microcomputer 118, “no notice effect” is selected when the extracted value is within the range of “0 to 126”. When the extracted value is in the range of “127 to 216”, “notice effect 1” is selected, and when the extracted value is in the range of “217 to 232”, “notice effect 2” is selected. When the determination result command indicating the “probable change big hit pre-determination command” is input to the effect control microcomputer 118, “no notice effect” is selected when the extracted value is within the range of “0 to 126”. When the extracted value is in the range of “127 to 142”, “notice effect 1” is selected, and when the extracted value is in the range of “143 to 232”, “notice effect 2” is selected.

  FIG. 11B is a high-probability table that is looked up when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability). Similarly, in the high probability table, the range of extracted values of the display control random number RS for selecting “no notice effect”, “notice effect 1”, and “notice effect 2” for each determination result command is stored. For example, when a determination result command indicating a “reach pre-determination command” is input to the effect control microcomputer 118, “no notice effect” is selected when the extracted value is within the range of “0 to 221”. When the extracted value is within the range of “222 to 231”, “notice effect 1” is selected, and when the extracted value is “232”, “notice effect 2” is selected. When the determination result command indicating the “non-probable change big hit pre-determination command” is input to the effect control microcomputer 118, “no notice effect” is selected in the entire range of the extracted value “0 to 232”. There is no case where “notice effect 1” or “notice effect 2” is selected. As a result, when the notice effect is performed during the probability change, either the reach or the probability change big hit is obtained. That is, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without causing the player to wake up the player that the announcement effect is performed and the game is not a probable big hit or reach. In addition, during the probability change, there is a possibility that the notice effect is selected at the time of reach other than the probability change big hit, so the “gase notice effect” is possible, and the player's interest can be further improved.

  In this way, the effect control microcomputer 118 is based on the determination result command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99, the probability of being a big hit state, and the extracted value from the display control random number, and the first decoration variation display section 8k. And the control which displays "notice effect" in the 2nd decoration fluctuation display part 9k is performed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 corresponds to the variation pattern command and the notice effect that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99, and a sound control command related to the generation of the game sound and a lamp control command related to the lighting pattern such as a decoration lamp. Are transmitted to the audio frame lamp substrate 92, respectively. Thereby, when execution of the notice effect is determined, a control command for executing generation of game sound and lighting of the lamp can be transmitted in synchronization with the notice effect, so that the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration are transmitted. It is possible to prevent inconveniences in which the effects and the like displayed on the fluctuation display portion 9k and the game sound / lamp lighting are shifted from each other. Further, the effect control board 90 can select the contents of the effect according to the probability of distribution by the notice selection table from the three types of “not notice effect 1” and “not notice effect 2” in addition to “not notice effect 2”. Yes. Therefore, it becomes possible to diversify the notice effect, and the game can be continued without getting tired, and the interest can be improved.

  Next, the first variation display unit (first special symbol display unit 8, first decoration variation display unit 8k) and second variation display unit (second special symbol display unit 9, second decoration variation) in the probability variation state and the short time state. The operation of the display unit 9k) will be described.

  First, the operation of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit when the time-shortening control mode after the end of the probability variation control mode is terminated by reaching a predetermined variation display count (for example, 100 times) will be described. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining the operations of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit in the probability variation state and the short time state. In FIG. 12, (a) shows whether the state is controlled to the probability variation state or the non-probability variation state, and (b) shows whether the state is controlled to the time-short state or non-time-short state. ) Shows whether the big hit state or the non-big hit state is controlled, (d) shows whether the first fluctuation display portion is controlled in the fluctuation state or the stopped state, and (e) Shows whether the second variation display unit is controlled to be in a variation state or a stopped state. In addition, the number with a circle shown in the lower column in FIG. 12 indicates the timing in each of (a) to (e), and is simply expressed as a timing 1 to timing 7 hereinafter.

  Timing 1 indicates the timing when the first variation display unit starts the variation display for generating the big hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the combination of the probability variation big hit symbol. Timing 2 shows the timing when the variation display started at timing 1 ends, the combination of probability variation jackpot symbols is derived and displayed as a variation display result, and a jackpot state occurs. Timing 3 shows the timing when the big hit state started at timing 2 ends. Timing 4 shows the timing when the variation display that becomes the non-probability big hit, which is one of the probability change end conditions for ending the probability change state, is started. Timing 5 shows the timing when the fluctuation display started at timing 4 ends, the combination of uncertain variable big hit symbols is derived and displayed as a fluctuation display result, and a big hit state occurs. Timing 6 shows the timing when the big hit state started at timing 5 ends. Timing 7 shows the timing when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after timing 5.

  Prior to timing 1, since the probability variation flag and time reduction flag described later are not set and the probability variation control mode is not set, the jackpot determination described later is performed based on the normal jackpot occurrence probability, and the game described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern is determined using a data table that is looked up when the state is the normal gaming state. At timing 1, the variation display being executed by the second variation display unit is similarly determined based on the normal jackpot occurrence probability, which will be described later, and the gaming state described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern is determined using a data table that is looked up when the game state is not the normal game state. For the variable display that starts from timing 1 to timing 4, the jackpot determination is performed in a high probability state that is higher than the normal jackpot occurrence probability. For the fluctuation display that starts from timing 1 to timing 4, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the data table that is looked up when the gaming state described in FIG. 9C is the first state. . In addition, with respect to the fluctuation display started from timing 4 to timing 7, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the data table looked up when the gaming state described in FIG. 9B is the second state. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag is set (ON) at timing 1 at which the first variation display unit starts variation display that generates a jackpot gaming state based on the variation display result of the combination of probability variation big winning symbols. , The time reduction flag is set (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability variation state and is controlled to the probability variation control mode, which is controlled to the time reduction state. The data of various flags used in the game control microcomputer 99 such as the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are stored in the RAM 55 and updated. Note that the timing at which the probability variation flag and the hourly flag are set when the jackpot gaming state based on the variation display result of the combination of probability variation jackpot symbols is not limited to the timing at which the variation display is started, but the probability variation indicated by timing 3 You may comprise so that it may be set when the jackpot game state based on the variation display result of the jackpot symbol combination is completed.

  The probability variation state is the first probability variation termination condition that the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the variation display is executed after the timing 2 without displaying the display result of the jackpot symbol combination. A second probability variation end condition is established in which the variation display in which the display result of the combination of the non-probability variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed before the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after timing 2 is performed. Continue until. In FIG. 12, as shown in the timing 4, the second probability variation end condition is established by starting the variation display that becomes the non-probability variation big hit, and the probability variation flag is reset (OFF) when the variation display is started. ) Is shown. On the other hand, when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied, the variation display of the predetermined number of times (for example, 100th) when the display result of the combination of jackpot symbols is not derived and displayed in the probability variation state is started. The probability variation flag is reset. As described above, the probability variation flag establishes the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition when the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition is satisfied in the probability variation state. It is reset at the start of variable display. In this case, as the time reduction flag, the set state is stored as it is. After the probability variation flag is reset in this way, the control state is set to the time-shortening control mode in which the probability variation flag is reset and the time-shortening flag is set.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation display that establishes the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition may be started immediately after the probability variation flag is reset. Further, the probability variation flag may be reset immediately after the start of the variable display that will establish the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition. The first probability variation termination condition, the second probability variation termination condition, or the first probability variation termination condition and the second probability variation termination condition in the present embodiment are referred to as a first termination condition.

  In the time-short state in the time-short control mode, the first time-short end condition is satisfied that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the timing 5 when the variable display for which the probability change flag is reset is ended. Or until the second short-term termination condition that the display result of the combination of uncertain big hit symbols is derived and displayed until the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is executed. FIG. 12 shows a case where the fluctuation display started at timing 7 is the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) from timing 5 onward. When the variable display is started at the timing 7, the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, and when the variable display is started, the time reduction flag is reset. As a result, the control state in the time-saving control mode ends. In this manner, the time reduction flag is reset at the start of the variable display that establishes the first time reduction end condition when the first time reduction end condition is satisfied in the time reduction state.

  Next, the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit in the case where the short-time control mode after the end of the probability variation control mode ends due to occurrence of a non-probability variation big hit before reaching a predetermined number of variation displays (for example, 100 times). The operation of the fluctuation display unit will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit in the probability variation state and the short time state. In FIG. 13, (a) to (e) show control states for the same items as (a) to (e) of symbol 12.

  In the case of FIG. 13, timings 1 to 6 are in the same control state as in FIG. Timing 7 is a variation that becomes a non-probable big hit that is one of the short-term end conditions for ending the state of the short-time control mode at a stage before the number of times of fluctuation display from timing 5 onward reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). The timing when the display is started is shown. Timing 8 shows the timing when the fluctuation display started at timing 7 ends, the combination of the uncertain variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the fluctuation display result, and the big hit state occurs. Timing 9 shows the timing when the big hit state started at timing 8 ends. By starting the variable display that becomes the uncertain change big hit at the timing 7, the second time-short end condition is satisfied, and when the variable display is started, the time-short flag is reset. As a result, the control state in the time-saving control mode ends. In this manner, the time reduction flag is reset at the start of the variable display that establishes the second time reduction end condition when the second time reduction end condition is satisfied in the time reduction state. The first short-time end condition, the second short-time end condition, or the first short-time end condition and the second short-time end condition in the present embodiment are referred to as a second end-short condition.

  The relationship between the probability variation state and the short time state is as follows in the present embodiment. When the probability variation big hit is reached, the probability variation control mode including the probability variation state and the time reduction state is controlled. The probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are state data indicating a gaming state, and are set when a variation display that becomes a probability variation big hit is started (see timing 1). The probability variation flag is a variable display for which the second probability variation end condition is satisfied if the second probability variation end condition (non-probability large hit) is satisfied before the first probability variation end condition (predetermined number of variations display) is satisfied. It is reset at the start (timing 4). The probability variation flag is reset when the first probability variation end condition (predetermined number of times of variation display) is satisfied, at the start of the variation display where the first probability variation end condition is satisfied. When the probability change flag is reset and the time reduction flag is set as described above, the time reduction control mode including the time reduction state is included without including the probability change state. The time-short flag is a first time-short end condition (predetermined number of fluctuations) after the end of the variable display in which the first probability change end condition (predetermined number of fluctuation display) or the second probability change end condition (non-probability variable big hit) is satisfied. If the second short-time end condition (non-probable big hit) is satisfied before the (display) is satisfied, it is reset at the start of the variable display where the second short-time end condition is satisfied (timing 7 in FIG. 13). In addition, when the first short-time end condition (predetermined number of fluctuation display) is satisfied, the probability variation flag is reset at the start of the variable display where the first short-time end condition is satisfied (timing 7 in FIG. 12). The probability variation control mode in the present embodiment refers to a state in which the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set and the probability variation state and the time reduction state are controlled. The variable speed control mode is a state in which the probability variable flag is reset, the short time flag is set, and control is performed only in the short time state.

  In the variation display started after timing 7, since the probability variation flag and the short time flag are not set, the big hit determination described later is performed based on the normal big hit occurrence probability, and the gaming state described in FIG. The variation pattern is determined using a data table that is looked up when the normal gaming state is not the short-time state.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. 14 and 15 show main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 99 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 99 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset signal from the power supply board 910 becomes a high level (off state), the game control microcomputer 99 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. Thereafter, the main processing after step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 99 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 99 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3).

  Next, a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software is executed. Specifically, first, the initialization wait number specification value 1 is set in the wait counter 1 (S81). Further, the initialization wait number designation value 2 is set in the wait counter 2 (S82). Note that general-purpose registers (HL register and BC register) built in the game control microcomputer 99 are used as the wait counters 1 and 2. Then, the value of the wait counter 2 is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter 2 becomes 0 (S83, S84). When the value of the wait counter 2 becomes 0, the value of the wait counter 1 is decremented by 1 (S85). When the value of the wait counter 1 is not 0 (S86), the process returns to S82. If the value of the wait counter 1 is 0, the software delay process is terminated.

  When the software delay processing is not executed by the software delay processing as described above, almost only [(initialization wait number specification value 1) × (initialization wait number specification value 2) × (processing time of S83, S84)]. Compared to, the start timing of the game control process can be delayed. In other words, the initialization weight count designation values 1 and 2 are determined so that the start timing of the game control process can be delayed by a desired time. Note that the values of the initialization wait times designation values 1 and 2 are set in the ROM 54. The software delay processing described here is an example, and the software delay processing may be realized by other methods.

  The game control microcomputer 99 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) as a built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit). Two external clock / timer trigger inputs CLK / TRG 2 and 3 and two timer outputs ZC / TO 0 and 1 are provided.

  When the software delay processing is completed, the built-in device registers are initialized (settings such as input / output assignment of the built-in devices) and the built-in devices CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized. Perform (S4). The initialization of PIO is, for example, setting an off state value to all bits of the output port. The initialization of the CTC is a timer mode setting or the like.

  In the game control microcomputer 99 used in this embodiment, the following three types of modes are prepared as maskable interrupt modes. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the game control microcomputer 99 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Interrupt mode 0: The built-in device that made the interrupt request sends an RST instruction (1 byte) or a CALL instruction (3 bytes) onto the internal data bus of the game control microcomputer 99. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 99 executes an instruction at an address corresponding to the RST instruction or an address specified by the CALL instruction. At the time of resetting, the game control microcomputer 99 automatically enters the interrupt mode 0. Therefore, when setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2, it is necessary to perform a process for setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2 in the initial setting process.

  Interrupt mode 1: When an interrupt is accepted, the mode always jumps to address 0038 (h).

  Interrupt mode 2: The address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the microcomputer 99 for game control and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is It is a mode that indicates a cover address. That is, the interrupt address is an address indicated by 2 bytes in which the upper address is the value of the specific register and the lower address is the interrupt vector. Therefore, an interrupt process can be set at an arbitrary address (although it is skipped). Each built-in device has a function of transmitting an interrupt vector when making an interrupt request.

  Therefore, when the interrupt mode 2 is set, it becomes possible to easily process an interrupt request from each built-in device, and it is possible to install an interrupt process at an arbitrary position in the program. . Furthermore, unlike interrupt mode 1, it is also easy to prepare each interrupt process for each interrupt generation factor. As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 99 is set to the interrupt mode 2 in S2 of the initial setting process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 99 executes a payout start command transmission process for transmitting a payout start command (payout start command) to the payout control board 98 (S5), and then sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (S6). .

  The game control microcomputer 99 confirms the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 input via the input port 1 only once (S7). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 99 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15). When the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is in an on state (when pressed), a low level clear switch signal is output. Note that in the input port 1, the clear switch signal is in the high level. Further, for example, the game store clerk can easily execute the initialization process by starting the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the clear switch 921 (for example, turning on the power switch 914). That is, the RAM can be cleared.

  If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is not in the ON state, the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is confirmed whether or not (S8). In this embodiment, when power supply stops, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. If it is confirmed that such protection processing has been performed, the game control microcomputer 99 determines that there is a backup. When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the game control microcomputer 99 executes initialization processing.

  Whether or not the protection process has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process described later according to the execution of the data protection process in the backup RAM area (for example, It is confirmed by whether or not 2). Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that data protection processing has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in S8. If it is confirmed, it may be determined that there is a backup.

  If it is determined that there is a backup, the game control microcomputer 99 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 99 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the processes of S10 to S15) that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped. To do.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 99 returns a game for returning the internal state of the game control microcomputer 99 and the control state of the electric component control means such as the display control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. State recovery processing is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S92). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 99 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S93), and in accordance with the contents, the effect control board 90 and the payout control board 98 are supplied with power. Control is performed so that a recovery command indicating that the supply has been recovered is transmitted (S94). Then, the process proceeds to S15.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 99 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  According to the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. are selected according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing processing automatically. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal). Then, the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S13), and an initialization command for initializing the backup storage data in the RAM of the payout control board 98 according to the contents thereof. Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S14).

  In S15, the game control microcomputer 99 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 99 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the game control microcomputer 99 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the game control microcomputer 99 is disabled (S16), and the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed. When completed, the interrupt is permitted (S19). Here, the display random number is a count value of R3 to R5 among the random counters R1 to R8 described above. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a random counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number is a count value of R7 and R8 among the random counters R1 to R8 described above. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In the random number update process in the game control process described later, when the value of the random counter of R1 and R6 is one round (having stepped by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that the counter can take), An initial value is set in the random counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is caused by the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid conflict with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, if a timer interrupt occurs during the processing of S17 and S18 and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number and the initial value random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, the count value Continuity may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of S17 and S18.

  Next, the operation of the microcomputer when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and when the power supply is stopped will be described below. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply exceeds a predetermined value, the power-off signal is turned off. When the value of VCC exceeds a predetermined value, the reset signal becomes high level. As described above, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to high level after turning off the power-off signal. The reset signal is input to the main board 120, the payout control board 98, and the voice frame lamp board 92. The reset signal is input to the effect control board 90 via the audio frame lamp board 92. The game control microcomputer 99 mounted on the main board 120, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98, and the effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 90. Entered.

  When the reset signal input to the main board 120 is input to the game control microcomputer 99 (when the input level becomes high), the game control microcomputer 99 is operable (the microcomputer is reset and the program is executed). Become a state). When in the operable state, the game control microcomputer 99 first executes a security check process for confirming whether or not the contents of the ROM are valid based on the security check program. When the security check process ends, a software delay process is executed. Thereafter, a payout activation command transmission process is executed, and after a check process of the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is performed, the game control process is started. If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 indicates an on state, RAM clear processing or the like is performed.

  The payout control microcomputer 660 becomes operable when the reset signal becomes high level. When in an operable state, first, a part of the initial setting process is executed. Thereafter, it waits for a payout start command to be sent from the main board 120, and when it receives a payout start command, it performs a check process of the output state of the initialization command and the recovery command from the game control microcomputer 99. Thereafter, the payout control process is started. If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 indicates an on state, RAM clear processing or the like is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 99 transmits a payout start command immediately before performing the process of checking the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921, and when the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms the payout start command, the game control microcomputer 99 A process of checking which of the initialization command and the recovery command from the computer 99 has been output is performed. Further, when the game control microcomputer 99 starts the payout start command transmission process by executing the security check process and the software delay process, the payout control microcomputer 660 waits for the payout start command to be transmitted. It is in a state.

  Therefore, for example, even though the payout control microcomputer 660 has checked the initialization command and the recovery command, the game control microcomputer 99 does not check the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921. This situation is prevented from occurring. On the contrary, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the check process of the output signal from the clear switch 921, but the payout control microcomputer 660 does not perform the initialization command and recovery command check processes. The situation is prevented from occurring. That is, the contents of each storage means in both the game control microcomputer 99 and the payout control microcomputer 660 can be reliably initialized based on the operation of the operation means.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply gradually decreases. However, when the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply falls below a predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal (low level). ). The power-off signal is input to the main board 120, the payout control board 98, and the effect control board 90. The game control microcomputer 99 mounted on the main board 120, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98, and the effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 90 are: In response to the power-off signal being output, a power supply stop process (also referred to as a power-off control process) is executed. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when VCC falls below a predetermined value. The game control microcomputer 99 mounted on the main board 120, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98, and the effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 90 are: The system is reset in response to the reset signal becoming low level. That is, the game control microcomputer 99, the payout control microcomputer 660, and the effect control microcomputer 118 are not operated. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the power supply cutoff signal is output when the power supply voltage decreases.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing executed by the game control microcomputer 99. This timer interruption process is executed once every 2 msec, for example. The game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process in the timer interrupt process.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, it is confirmed whether or not a power-off signal is output from the power supply board 910, and after executing the power-off process (S21) for performing a predetermined backup operation, the interrupt process of S22 to S35. The game control process is executed. In the game control process, first, the CPU 56, via the switch circuit 32, the first gate switch 61, the first start port switch 62, the first count switch 63, the first V winning switch 64, the second gate switch 66, the second Detection signals of switches such as the start port switch 67, the second count switch 68, the second V prize winning switch 69 and the like are input, and a switch process for determining the state of these is performed (S22).

  Then, the first special symbol process is performed (S23). In the first special symbol process, a corresponding process is selected according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8, the first special variable winning device 20 and the like in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. It is issued and executed. The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, in S24, a random number update process for updating the value of the random counter is performed. The random number update process in S24 is a process for updating each of R1 to R8 described above.

  Next, the second special symbol process is performed (S25). In the second special symbol process control, an appropriate process is selected according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 9, the second special variable winning device 22 and the like in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. It is issued and executed. The value of the second special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Also, the first normal symbol process is performed (S26). In the first normal symbol process, a corresponding process is selected and executed according to a first normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the first normal symbol display 12 in a predetermined order. The value of the first normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the second normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the second ordinary symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the second ordinary symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the second ordinary symbol display 13 in a predetermined order. The value of the second normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. The display control of the first normal symbol display 12 and the opening / closing control of the first variable winning device 15 are executed by executing the first normal symbol process, and the second normal symbol process is executed by executing the second normal symbol process. Display control of the display 13 and opening / closing control of the second variable winning device 17 are executed.

  Next, effect control commands relating to the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c variably displayed on the first decorative variation display portion 8k and the second decorative symbols 9a to 9c variably displayed on the second decorative variation display portion 9k are stored in the RAM 55 in a predetermined manner. A decorative symbol command control process is performed to send an effect control command to the area (S28). Further, for example, information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer is performed (S29).

  The number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 62, the first count switch 63, the first V winning switch 64, the second starting port switch 67, the second count switch 68, the second V winning switch 69, etc. Prize ball processing for setting and the like is executed (S30). Specifically, one of the first start port switch 62, the first count switch 63, the first V winning switch 64, the second starting port switch 67, the second count switch 68, the second V winning switch 69, etc. is turned on. In response to the winning detection based on, a winning ball control signal indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control board 98. The payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98 drives the ball payout device 154 in accordance with a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls.

  Then, a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved memories is executed (S31). In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (S32). Further, a solenoid output process (S33) is executed for instructing the solenoid circuit 33 to drive the various solenoids when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The first variable winning device 15, the first special variable winning device 20, the second variable winning device 17, and the second special variable winning device 22 are opened or closed, or the first grand prize port 21 and the second grand prize port The solenoid circuit 33 drives the solenoids 71 to 76 in response to the drive command in order to switch the game ball passage in the 23.

  Next, a special symbol display control process is performed (S34). In the special symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9 is performed. Further, a normal symbol display control process is performed (S35). In the normal symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the first normal symbol display 12 and the second normal symbol display 13 is performed. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S36).

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 msec. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  17 and 18 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the power-off process in S21. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 99 executes the following process. First, it is confirmed whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in an on state) (S450). If not in the on state, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 55 is cleared to 0 (S451). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer is increased by 1 (S452). If the value of the backup monitoring timer coincides with a determination value (for example, 2) (S453), the power supply stop processing after S454, that is, the preparation processing for power supply stop is executed. That is, the state shifts from the state in which the progress of the game is controlled to the state in which the power supply stop process (power-off control process) for saving the game state (game state data) is executed. Note that “formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even if the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in S8 in the main process, it can be confirmed that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same value as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, parity data is created (S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (S455). Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (S458), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (S459), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (S460). Then, the processes of S457 to S460 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 99 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (S471). Thereafter, the internal RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the start address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The game control microcomputer 99 loads the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (S473). Also, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (S474), and the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the output port address) is loaded (S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (S476), and the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to S474. If the number of processes is 0, that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (S481) and the loop process is started.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (S482). When the power-off signal is turned off, the execution address at power-on (S1 address) is set as the return address, the return instruction is executed (S483), and timer interrupt processing is performed by RETI (Return from interrupt) To return to the main process. Specifically, the gaming device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled (concept that includes both control by itself and transmission of a command signal for control by another microcomputer). Return to state.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the reset signal is in a low level on state (S484). When the reset signal is turned on, that is, when the game control microcomputer 99 confirms that the reset signal is turned on, the game control microcomputer 99 enters the system reset state (system Reset). That is, the game control microcomputer 99 is returned to the operation stop state which is the start state. As described above, the voltage level of the detection voltage for turning on the reset signal in this embodiment is set to +4.5 V, which is higher than the drive voltage (for example, 4 V) of the game control microcomputer 99. As a result, the gaming control microcomputer 99 is actively stopped even when a voltage higher than the drive voltage is still being supplied.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop processing of S454 to S481 is executed, and data (specified value with backup and checksum) indicating that the power supply stop processing has been executed is stored. Stored in the backup RAM, the RAM access is prohibited, the output port is cleared, and the timer interrupt for executing the game control process is set to the prohibited state.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). In this example, the checksum based on the contents of the RAM 55 when the power-off signal is output is stored in the backup area of the RAM 55 together with the value of the backup monitoring timer by the processes of S452 to S479. After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control microcomputer 99 performs data stored in the RAM 55 (by the game control microcomputer 99 immediately before the power supply is stopped) by the above-described processing of S91 to S94. According to the data indicating the gaming state that is the control state (including the process flag state, the big hit flag state, the probability variation flag state, the output port output state, etc.), the gaming state immediately before the power supply is stopped It can be returned to the state. If the power supply stop period exceeds a predetermined period, the backup monitoring timer value and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process of S10 to S14 is executed. .

  As described above, the data for returning the gaming state to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped is reliably stored in a part of the RAM 55 by the power supply stop process (preparation process for power supply stop). Is done. Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the gaming state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped.

  If the power-off signal is turned off, the process returns to S1. In this case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the game state recovery process of S91 to S94 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal from the payout control board 98 is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the game control process does not stop, and the game control process is automatically continued.

  The connection confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 98 is set to the off state by the process of clearing the output port. In the setting of the work area in S92 and S12, the contents of the output port buffer corresponding to the connection confirmation signal are set to values corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal. Then, when the prize ball process of S30 is executed, the contents of the output port buffer are output to the output port, so that the connection confirmation signal to the payout control board 98 is turned on. Therefore, the connection confirmation signal is output (turned on) when the main board 120 rises. Note that the connection confirmation signal is also output when the power supply is recovered from an instantaneous power interruption or the like.

  Next, control signals transmitted and received between the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 99 to the payout control microcomputer 660.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of control signals are transmitted and received between the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 120 rises (when the game control microcomputer 99 starts the game control process), and the main board 120 rises with respect to the payout control board 98. This is a signal (connection confirmation signal for the main board 120) for notifying that. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning ball can be paid out. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 99 transmits the payout activation command before starting the game control process after S6 in FIG. 14, the connection confirmation signal need not be used. When the connection confirmation signal is not used, the payout activation command also serves as a signal indicating that the prize ball can be paid out.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that becomes an output state (= on state) when a prize ball payout request is issued, or when a payout activation command, an initialization command, or a recovery command is transmitted. Further, when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on from the payout control microcomputer 660, the prize ball REQ signal is stopped (off state = all 0 state). The award ball control signal is used as a signal (award ball number command, award ball number signal) that is output to designate the number of game balls (1 to 15) that make a payout request.

  The award ball BUSY signal is a signal that is turned on when the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms the on state of the award ball REQ signal at the time of a prize ball payout request, and is turned off after a predetermined period. . That is, it corresponds to an acceptance confirmation signal for the prize ball REQ signal. Therefore, the state where the prize ball BUSY signal is OFF corresponds to a state waiting for a prize ball number command reception. The winning ball number signal is used as a payout activation command when bit 4 = 1 and bit 0 = 1. The prize ball number signal is used as an initialization command when the prize ball number signal is bit 4 = 1 and bit 1 = 1. The prize ball number signal is used as a recovery command when the prize ball number signal is bit 4 = 1 and bit 2 = 1.

  FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a prize ball control signal. As shown in FIG. 20, the game control microcomputer 99 sends a payout start command (payout start command) to the payout control microcomputer 660 in connection with the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Send. Specifically, 10 (H) is output as the prize ball control signal, and the prize ball REQ signal is turned on.

  When the game ball winning is detected, the game control microcomputer 99 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and sets the output state of the prize ball control signal according to the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize. To the state. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 62 and the second start port switch 67, four prize balls are paid out. When detected, seven prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 63, the first V prize switch 64, the second count switch 68, and the second V prize switch 69, 15 prize balls are paid out. To do. As described above, since the prize ball control signal is composed of 5 bits, the lower 5 bits of the prize ball number commands of 00 (H) to 0F (H) represented by 8 bits are The prize ball control signal is transmitted from the main board 120 to the payout control board 98. Hereinafter, the prize ball control signal may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball control signal”, but in reality, the prize ball control signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 5 bits of 0F (H). When the prize ball control signal is used for transmitting the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with winning, the most significant bit (bit 4) is 0.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol variation display is executed by the two displays of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9, and the first ornament variation display unit 8k and the second ornament variation display. The variable display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c and the second decorative symbols 9a to 9c is executed by the two variable display units with the unit 9k. And control which transfers to a big hit game state is performed when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by any one of the first special symbol display 8 and the second special symbol display 9. As described above, in a gaming machine that includes a plurality of variation display units and displays the variation of the special symbol in each variation display unit, there is a possibility that a big hit gaming state may occur at the same time. For this reason, in this embodiment, control is performed so that the big hit gaming state does not occur at the same time in the two variation display units. Hereinafter, display control in the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit including these controls will be mainly described. In the following description, processing for mainly controlling the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration fluctuation display unit 8k will be described. However, the second special symbol display 9 and the second decoration fluctuation display unit 9k The same control is executed for the control process.

  Next, processing contents of the first special symbol process (S23) and the second special symbol process (S25) will be described. The processing contents of the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process are such that the first special symbol process is targeted for the first variation display unit (the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k). The process is different and the second special symbol process is performed on the second variation display unit (the second special symbol display unit 9 and the second decoration variation display unit 9k). The processing content for controlling the display unit is the same. Therefore, here, the first special symbol process will be described as a representative example of these special symbol process, and the description of the processing contents of the second special symbol process will not be repeated. Note that the processing content of the first special symbol process described below is that the processing target of the first variation display unit in the first special symbol process is replaced with the processing target of the second variation display unit, and the first effect. By replacing data such as various flags used in the control process with data such as various flags used in the second effect control process, the processing contents of the second special symbol process are obtained.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 99. In the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first variation display unit is executed. The game control microcomputer 99 performs the following processing in the first special symbol process. First, if the first start port switch 62 is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning port 14 is generated (S211), the first start port switch passing process (S212) is performed. After that, any one of S200 to S207 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the first start port switch passing process, it is confirmed whether the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer of RAM 55 (the number of stored storage) has reached the upper limit value, and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. If the number of stored numerical data does not reach the maximum value, the count value of the first reserved storage counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by one. Then, each numerical data such as a big hit determination random number from a big hit determination random counter (for example, a function of the CPU 56 which updates (counts up) the numerical data (a big hit determination random number, etc.)) as a numerical data update means. A process of extracting (random number) values and storing them in a storage area (corresponding to the value of the first reserved storage counter) corresponding to the extraction order of the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Conditions for extracting numerical data when the first start port switch 62 is turned on and the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer (the number of stored storage) has not reached the upper limit value. Is established. The extraction of numerical data (random numbers) means that a random number is read from a counter for generating the numerical data (random number) and the read random number is used as the value of the numerical data (random number).

  First special symbol normal processing (S200): Wait until the first special symbol display 8 can start the variable display. When the variable display of the first special symbol display 8 can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory buffer (first reserved memory number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the first hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the first hold storage counter. If the count value of the first reserved storage counter is not 0, whether or not to make a big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol display 8 (whether or not to make the first special figure specific display result) is determined. decide. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S201.

  First special symbol stop symbol setting process (S201): The first special symbol after variation display using the extracted value of the random counter R2 for determining the jackpot symbol or the extracted value of the random counter R3 for determining the off symbol described above The stop symbol (big hit symbol or off symbol) of the symbol display 8 is determined. Further, when determining the stop symbol, reach determination is performed using the extracted value of the random counter R5 for reach determination described above, and when reaching the reach, when the reach is determined, the extracted symbol in front of the outlier symbol determined using the extracted value of R3 is used. The jackpot symbol is determined as the reach symbol. Then, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S202.

  The stop symbol of the first special symbol display 8 is randomly determined from the symbols “3, 5, and 7” defined as the probability variation big hit symbol when the probability variation big hit is reached. The stop symbol of the first special symbol display 8 is randomly determined from the identification information “1, 9” determined as the non-probable variation big hit symbol when the non-probable big hit symbol is reached. The stop symbol of the first special symbol display 8 is randomly determined from the identification information “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” defined as the loss symbol when the symbol is lost. The same applies to the stop symbol of the second special symbol indicator 9.

  First variation pattern setting process (S202): The variation pattern (variation display data) of the variation display of the variation display of the first special symbol display 8 is extracted, and the value of the random counter R4 for variation pattern determination is extracted. It is selected and determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation display data) determined in advance according to the value. The variation pattern refers to the value of R1 and R5 extracted at the start winning, and determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it reaches reach. Is selected and determined using the data table described with reference to FIG. That is, in the first state in which the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set, the data table in FIG. 9C is looked up, and the variation pattern is selected and determined. In the second state in which the time reduction flag is set, the data table of FIG. 9B is looked up, and the variation pattern is selected and determined. When the normal game state in which the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set, the data table in FIG. 9A is looked up, and the variation pattern is selected and determined. The information called the fluctuation pattern includes information that can specify the type of the fluctuation pattern and the time for executing the fluctuation display (fluctuation time). Further, based on the selected and determined variation pattern, the first special symbol display 8 sets the variation time (the time from the variation start time to the display result derivation display time) in the first special symbol process timer, 1 Start the special symbol process timer. And the drive signal for starting the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol is set. The drive signal set here is output in the special symbol display control process (S34) of FIG. Also, a first variation pattern command, which is a command for commanding a variation pattern including information on the length of variation time of variation display of the first decorative symbol, is set. The first variation pattern command set here is output to the effect control microcomputer 118 in S28 of FIG. Then, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S203.

  First special symbol variation process (S203): When the variation time in the variation pattern selected and determined in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the first special symbol process timer set in S202 times out), the first special symbol variation process The process flag is updated to shift to S204.

  First special symbol stop process (S204): Control is performed so that symbols that are variably displayed on each of the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k are stopped. Specifically, a drive signal for stopping the first special symbol is set. The drive signal set here is output in S34 of FIG. Then, a first symbol stop command for stopping the first decorative symbol is set. The first symbol stop command set here is output to the production control microcomputer 118 in S28 of FIG. If the first big hit flag is set, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S205. Otherwise, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S200.

  First big prize opening pre-processing (S205): Control for opening the first big prize opening 21 is started. Specifically, the counter and the flag are initialized, and the first special prize winning opening 21 is opened by driving the solenoid 72 to open the first special variable winning device 20. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S206.

  Processing during opening of first big prize opening (S206): Control for sending production control command for round display during first big hit gaming state to production control board 90 and confirmation of establishment of closing condition for first big prize opening 21 Processing is performed. When the closing condition of the last first grand prize opening 21 is established, the presence or absence of passage of the first V prize switch 64 provided in the first big prize opening 21 is monitored to confirm that the big hit gaming state continuation condition is established. Perform the process. If the big hit gaming state continuation condition is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S205. In addition, when the big hit gaming state continuation condition is not satisfied within a predetermined effective time, or when all rounds are finished, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S207.

  First jackpot end process (S207): Control is performed to cause the effect control board 90 to perform display control for notifying the player that the first jackpot game state has ended. Then, the first special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S200.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the first start port switch passing process described in the first special symbol process of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a start winning in the first start winning opening 14 (S41). If there is no start winning, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processing. If there is a starting winning, whether the first reserved memory number indicating the count value of the first reserved memory counter is “4” or not. A determination is made (S42). If the first reserved memory number is “4”, the process ends. If the first reserved memory number is not “4”, a process of adding “1” to the first reserved memory number is performed (S43). . That is, a process of adding 1 to the count value of the first hold storage counter is performed.

  Next, a process of extracting random numbers from R1, R2, and R5 described above is performed (S44). Then, a first random number determination process for making various determinations using the extracted random number is performed (S45). Here, based on the random numbers extracted as described later, a prior determination command as described later is set. Next, a process of storing the random numbers extracted in S44 in the corresponding first reserved storage buffers is performed (S46).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the first random number determination process described in the first start port switch passing process of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the random number extracted from R1 is “7”, which is a big hit (S61). When the random number is “7”, it is determined whether or not the random number extracted from R2 is “odd number” that is a big hit of probability variation (S62). If it is “odd”, the first probability variation jackpot advance judgment command is set for transmission (S63). If it is not “odd”, the first non-probability variation jackpot advance judgment command is set for transmission (S64). 1 The random number determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the game is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not a probability variation flag indicating that the current gaming state is changing in probability is set (S65). If the probability is changing, it is determined whether or not the random number extracted from R1 is “7, 17, 41, 57, 107” (S66). The process proceeds to S62 and the above-described processing is performed. If not, it is determined whether or not the random number extracted from R5 is any one of “5, 14, 31” that can reach the reach state (S67). If it is “5, 14, 31”, the first reach advance determination command is set to be transmitted (S68). If it is not “5, 14, 31”, the first deviation is detected. The advance determination command is set to be transmitted (S69), and the first random number determination process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the first probabilistic big hit pre-determination command, the first non-probable big hit pre-determination command, the first reach pre-determination command, and the first off-set pre-determination command that are set in the first random number determination process are collectively This is called a pre-judgment result command. In the second random number determination process similarly executed in the second special symbol process in S25 of FIG. 16, the second probability variable big hit prior determination command, the second 2 non-probability variable big hit pre-determination command, second reach pre-determination command, and second outlier pre-determination command are set. The second pre-determination result command is a combination of the second probability variation jackpot pre-determination command, the second non-probability variation big hit pre-determination command, the second reach pre-determination command, and the second outlier pre-determination command set in the second random number determination process. That's it. The first pre-judgment result command and the second pre-judgment result command are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 to the effect control microcomputer 118 at the time of starting winning in the decorative symbol command control process in S28 of FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (S200) in the first special symbol process. The game control microcomputer 99 performs the following processing in the first special symbol normal processing. First, it is confirmed whether or not the second big hit execution flag is set (S51). The second big hit running flag is displayed when the big special symbol (second special figure specific display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9 and the second big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) starts. It is set in the second special symbol variation process (not shown) in the symbol process (S25), and is reset in the second big hit end process (not shown) when the second big hit game state (specific game state) ends. The Next, the value of the first reserved memory counter is checked to determine whether or not the first reserved memory number is “0” (S52). The first special symbol normal process is executed when the special symbol variable display is not performed on the first special symbol display 8 and the game is not a big hit game.

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the process proceeds to S521 described later. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 0, it is determined whether or not the first demonstration display flag is set (S591). Here, the first demo display flag is set when the first special symbol display 8 and the first decoration variation display unit 8k (first variation display unit) have not performed symbol variation display for a predetermined time or more. This flag is set when one demonstration display (hereinafter abbreviated as demo display) is performed. When the first demonstration display flag is set, the process returns. On the other hand, when the first demonstration display flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the first non-variable time measurement flag is set (S592). Here, the first non-variable time measurement flag is a flag that is set when measuring the first non-variable time as a time when the symbol variation display is not performed on the first variation display unit.

  When the first non-variable time measurement flag is set, the value of the first non-variable time timer for measuring the first non-variable time in which the decorative symbols are not displayed in the first variation display section is updated. (S594). On the other hand, when the first non-variable time measurement flag is not set, the first non-variable time measurement flag is set (S593), and then the value of the first non-variable time timer is updated (S594). The first non-variable time timer may subtract and update numerical data corresponding to a predetermined time, or may add and update numerical data until a value corresponding to a predetermined time is reached. Good.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the first non-variable time timer is up due to the measured value becoming a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) (S595). When the first non-variable time timer has not expired, the process returns. On the other hand, when the first non-variable time timer has expired, a setting for transmitting the first demonstration display command is made (S596). When the first demonstration display command is set in this way, the first demonstration display command is output to the effect control microcomputer 118 in S28 of FIG. Then, the first demonstration display flag described above is set (S597), and the process returns.

  If it is determined in S52 that the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not the first non-variable time measurement flag is set (S521). When the first non-variable time measurement flag is set, the first non-variable time measurement flag is reset (S522), the first non-variable time timer is reset (S523), and the process proceeds to S524. Thereby, when the first reserved storage occurs, the data used for measuring the first non-variable time is reset. On the other hand, when the first non-variable time measurement flag is not set, the process proceeds to S524 as it is.

  In S524, it is determined whether or not the first demonstration display flag is set. When the first demonstration display flag is set, the first demonstration display flag is reset (S525), and the process proceeds to S52a. Thereby, when the first hold storage occurs, the data used for the first demonstration display is reset. On the other hand, when the first demonstration display flag is not set, the process proceeds to S52a.

  In S52a, an end-of-probability determination process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, is executed. Then, each random number stored in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S53). The value of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S54). That is, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always coincides with the order of the first number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3, and 4. ing. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

  Next, the big hit determination random number R1 is read from the random number storage buffer (S55), and a hit determination process described later with reference to FIG. 26 is executed (S56). As a result of the big hit determination process, when it is determined to be the first big hit (YES in S57), the CPU 56 sets the first big hit flag (S58). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (S201) (S59).

  By the above processing, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9 and the big hit gaming state occurs, the first special symbol display 8 is controlled not to start the special symbol variation display. That is, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9 and the big hit gaming state is generated, the second big hit running flag is set, and the second big hit big running flag is set until the big hit gaming state ends. Since it is not reset, YES is selected in S51 in the first special symbol normal process (S200) until the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9, and S52 to S59. Is not executed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an end-of-probability determination process in the first special symbol normal process and the second special symbol normal process. In the probability change end determination process, first, it is set when it is determined that a big hit is generated by the probability change big hit symbol, and it is determined whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is being set is set (S71). That is, it is determined whether or not the mode is the probability variation control mode. When the probability variation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S76.

  On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is set, it is determined whether or not the number of times of variation during probability variation has reached a preset number of probability variation ends (100 times) (S72). The number of fluctuations at the time of probability variation is one that is incremented every time the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the probability variation state, that is, in the probability variation control mode. It is stored in the area. If not reached, 1 is added to the number of fluctuations at the time of probability change (S73), and the end determination process at the time of probability change is terminated and the process returns. The number of times of change at the time of probability change is used in common in the end determination process at the time of probability change of the first special symbol normal process and the second special symbol normal process. If it has reached, the number of fluctuations during probability change is initialized (S74), the probability change flag is reset (S75), and the process proceeds to S79b described later. As described above, in the probability variation state according to the present embodiment, every time the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are started, the probability variation variation count is incremented by one in S73. The probability variation state ends when the probability variation flag is reset in S75 if it is determined in S72 that the probability variation time variation number has reached the probability variation end count.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S71 that the probability variation flag is not set, it is set when it is determined that the big hit is generated by the probability variation big hit symbol, and the time reduction flag which is a flag indicating that the time reduction state is in effect is set. It is determined whether or not (S76). Here, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set and the time reduction flag is set, that is, whether or not the time reduction control mode is set. When the time reduction flag is not set, the probability change end determination process ends and the process returns.

  On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is set, it is in the time reduction state in the time reduction control mode, so it is determined whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations has reached a preset time reduction end count (100 times) (S77). ). The number of fluctuations in the short time is added by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in the short time control mode, and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 55. Yes. If not reached, 1 is added to the number of fluctuations in the short time (S78), and the probability variation end determination process is terminated. If it has reached, the number of hourly fluctuations is initialized (S79), the hourly flag is reset (S79a), and the process proceeds to S79b described later. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time-short state in the time-shortening control mode is determined in S78 every time the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started after the probability variation flag is reset in step S75. When the number of change in time reduction is incremented by 1, and it is determined that the number of change in time reduction has reached the number of time reduction ends in S77, the time reduction flag is reset in S79a, and the process ends.

  In S79b, a second test signal creation flag is set. After S79b, the process returns. Here, the second test signal indicates that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a variable display count in the short-time control mode by executing the variable display of the first special symbol and has reached a predetermined short-time end count. This is a test signal for notifying the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the control state has been changed to the non-time-short state (the time-short control mode has been completed). The second test signal creation flag is a flag for instructing creation of the second test signal. In the second special symbol normal process (the process corresponding to the first special symbol normal process in S200) in the second special symbol process, a fourth test signal creation flag that is separate from the second test signal creation flag is set. The Here, the fourth test signal indicates that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the fact that the number of times of change display in the time-saving state in the time-saving control mode reaches the predetermined number of times of time-saving end by executing the variable display of the second special symbol. This is a test signal for notifying the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the control state has been changed to the non-time-short state (the time-short control mode has been completed). The fourth test signal creation flag is a flag for instructing creation of the fourth test signal.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process in the first special symbol normal process and the second special symbol normal process. In the big hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a probability variation flag is set (S111). When the probability change flag is set, “7, 17, 41, 57, 107”, which is predetermined as the probability change big hit determination value, is set as the big hit determination value A used for the big hit determination (S112). When the probability variation flag is not set, “7”, which is predetermined as a non-probability variation big hit determination value, is set to the big hit determination value A used for the big hit determination (S113). Then, the jackpot determination random number read in S55 of the first special symbol normal process or the corresponding process in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the jackpot determination value A to determine whether or not to determine the jackpot (S114). Then, the big hit determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop symbol setting process in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the following processing. First, it is determined whether or not the first big hit flag is set (S121). When the first big hit flag is not set, a random number is extracted from R3, and the off symbol is determined based on the extracted value (S130). That is, a symbol to be derived and displayed as a display result from “0” or an even symbol is determined based on the random number extracted from R3. Then, the process proceeds to S132.

  On the other hand, when the first jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol is determined based on the random number extracted from R2 at the time of starting winning (step 122). That is, based on the random number extracted from R2, the symbol derived and displayed as the display result from the odd symbol is determined. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the random number extracted from R2 is an odd number, one of “3, 5, 7” among the odd numbers is determined as the stop symbol, and R2 If the random number extracted from is an even number, one of the odd symbols “1, 9” is determined as the stop symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol determined in S122 is any one of “3, 5, 7” which is a probability variation jackpot symbol (S123). When it is determined that the probability variation big hit symbol is set, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set (S124, S125), and the process proceeds to S131a. When it is determined that the symbol is not the probability variation big hit symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S126). When the probability variation flag is set, the probability variation flag is reset (S127), and the process proceeds to S131. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S128). If the time reduction flag is not set, the process proceeds to S131a. On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset (S129), and the process proceeds to S131.

  In S131, a first test signal creation flag is set. Here, the first test signal means that the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed from the probability variation state or the time-short state to the non-probability variation state or the non-time-short state when the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes the uncertain variation big hit symbol. This is a test signal for notifying the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fact that the probability variation control mode has been completed or that the time-saving control mode has been completed. The first test signal creation flag is a flag for instructing creation of the first test signal. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (the process corresponding to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process in S201) in the second special symbol process, a third test signal is created separately from the first test signal creation flag. A flag is set. Here, the third test signal means that the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed from the probability variation state or the time-short state to the non-probability variation state or the non-time-short state when the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes an uncertain variation big hit symbol. This is a test signal for notifying the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fact that the probability variation control mode has been completed or the time-shortening control mode has been completed. The third test signal creation flag is a flag for instructing creation of the third test signal.

  After S131, the process proceeds to S131a. In S131a, a setting for transmitting a first stop symbol command for designating the type of stop symbol determined in S122 or S130 is performed. The first stop symbol command includes a probability variable big hit symbol command indicating a probability variable big hit symbol, a non-probable big hit symbol command indicating a non-probable big hit symbol, a reach off symbol command indicating a reach off symbol, and In addition, a non-reach off symbol command indicating that a non-reach off symbol is used is included. Here, when the outlier symbol is determined in S130, the reach determination is made based on the value of R5 described above. When reaching, the reach out symbol command is determined to be transmitted, while when not reaching, the reach is not reached. It decides to send the off symbol command. When the first stop symbol command is set in this way, the first stop symbol command is output to the effect control microcomputer 118 in S28 of FIG. Then, after S131a, the process proceeds to S132. In S132, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (S202).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit by the probability variation big hit symbol occurs, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set, and the probability variation control mode is controlled. In addition, when a big hit occurs due to a non-probable big hit symbol other than the probable big hit symbol during the probability changing state in the probability changing control mode, the probability changing flag is reset and the probability changing state ends, whereby the probability changing control mode ends. In addition, when a big hit occurs due to a non-probable change big hit symbol other than the probability change big hit symbol in the time reduction state in the time reduction control mode, the time reduction flag is reset and the time change control mode ends, thereby ending the time reduction control mode.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (S203) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process. First, it is confirmed whether or not the second big hit flag is set (S80). If the second jackpot flag is not set, the first special symbol process timer is decremented by 1 (S81), and if the first special symbol process timer times out (S82), whether or not the first jackpot flag is set. (S83). If the first big hit flag is set (S83), the first big hit execution flag is set (S84), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (S204). Update (S85). If the first special symbol process timer has not timed out in S82, the value of the first special symbol process flag is not updated. That is, when the first special symbol process is executed again, the first special symbol normal process is performed again. Further, when the first big hit execution flag is set in S84, the second special symbol process (S27) is executed to interrupt the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 9.

  If the second big hit flag is set in S80, it is confirmed whether or not the interruption flag is set (S86). If the interruption flag is not set (S86), it is checked whether or not the second big hit execution flag is set (S87). If the second big hit execution flag is not set, the process proceeds to S81 described above. . On the other hand, if the second big hit execution flag is set, the interruption flag is set (S88). And the process for interrupting the variable display of a 1st special symbol is performed (S88a). Specifically, a drive signal for interrupting the variable display of the first special symbol that is performing the variable display on the first special symbol display 8 is set, and the drive signal is the special symbol display control process (S34) of FIG. Is output. Further, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the first interruption command is set in the pointer (S89), and the process returns. The first interruption command is a command for instructing to interrupt the variable display of the first decorative symbol that is performing the variable display in the first decorative variable display portion 8k. Further, the first interruption command set in S89 is transmitted to the effect control board 90 in the decorative symbol command control process (S28) of FIG. That is, if it is determined in S87 that the second big hit execution flag is set, the special symbol process timer is not subtracted because the process of S81 is not executed, the first interruption flag is set, and the first interruption command is effect-controlled. Transmit to the substrate 90. When receiving the first interrupt command, the effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 90 executes control for interrupting the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c in the first decorative variable display unit 8k.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation display is executed on the first special symbol display 8 (when the first special symbol process timer has not timed out), the second big hit is executed. When the middle flag is set, the subtraction of the special symbol process timer for measuring the variation time is interrupted, and a command instructing to interrupt the variation display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. From the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) based on the fact that the big special symbol (second special figure specific display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 9, until the big hit gaming state ends. Processing for interrupting the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 8 and the first ornament variation display portion 8k on the first ornament symbols 8a to 8c is performed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process (S204) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process. First, a process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is performed (S90). Specifically, a drive signal for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is performing the variable display on the first special symbol display 8 is set, and the drive signal is the special symbol display control process (S34) of FIG. Is output. Thereby, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol determined as described above. Further, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the first symbol stop command is set in the pointer (S91). The first symbol stop command is a command for instructing to stop the variation display of the first ornament symbol on the first ornament variation display portion 8k. The first symbol stop command set in S91 is transmitted to the effect control board 90 in the decorative symbol command control process (S28) of FIG. When receiving the first symbol stop command, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes control for deriving and displaying the display results by stopping the variation display of the first ornament symbols 8a to 8c in the first ornament variation display unit 8k.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the first big hit flag is set (S92). If the first big hit flag is set in S92, that is, if it is determined that the big big hit flag is set in S57 in the first special symbol normal processing (S200) and the first big hit flag is set, the first big hit start command is accepted. The address of the command transmission table is set in the pointer (S93). The first jackpot start command set in S93 is transmitted to the effect control board 90 by the decorative symbol command control process (S28) of FIG. When receiving the first jackpot start command, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs display control for starting the jackpot gaming state on the first decoration variation display portion 8k.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the first test signal generation flag is set (S94). When the first test signal creation flag is set, the first test signal is created and set to a predetermined output port (S95), and the process proceeds to S96 described later. When the first test signal is created in S95, the first test signal creation flag is reset. The first test signal created in this way is output from the test terminal by the test terminal processing (S32) of FIG. As a result, when the probability variation control mode or the time reduction control mode ends based on the display result of the first special symbol becoming the non-probability variation big hit symbol, the first test signal is output from the test terminal.

  In the second special symbol stop process (the process corresponding to the first special symbol stop process in S204) in the second special symbol process, the third test signal creation flag is set by the process corresponding to S94 and S95. If so, a process for creating a third test signal is performed, and the third test signal creation flag is reset. As a result, when the probability variation control mode or the time reduction control mode is ended based on the display result of the second special symbol being a non-probability large hit symbol, the third test signal is output from the test terminal in the same manner as the first test signal described above. Is output.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S94 that the first test signal generation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S96 as it is. In S96, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (S205), and the process returns.

  If it is determined in S92 that the first big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second test signal generation flag is set (S97). When the second test signal creation flag is set, a second test signal is created and set in a predetermined output port (S98), and the process proceeds to S99 described later. When the second test signal is created in S98, the second test signal creation flag is reset. The second test signal created in this way is output from the test terminal by the test terminal processing (S32) of FIG. As a result, when the display result of the first special symbol is deviated and the variable display count counted as described above reaches the probability variation end count and the probability variation control mode ends, or the number of time reduction terminations. The second test signal is output when the short-time control mode ends after reaching.

  In the second special symbol stop process in the second special symbol process (the process corresponding to the first special symbol stop process in S204), the above-described fourth test signal creation flag is set by the processes corresponding to S97 and S98. If so, a process for creating a fourth test signal is performed, and the fourth test signal creation flag is reset. As a result, when the display result of the second special symbol is deviated and the variation display count counted as described above reaches the probability variation end count and the probability variation control mode ends, or the number of time reduction terminations. When the short-time control mode is terminated after reaching, the fourth test signal is output from the test terminal in the same manner as the second test signal described above.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S97 that the second test signal generation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S99 as it is. In S99, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S200), and the process returns.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (S207) in the first special symbol process. In the first big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process. First, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S101). The probability variation flag is set when it is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (S201) in the first special symbol process processing that the stopped symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol, and when the probability variation flag is set, the probability variation state is set. As described in S112 of FIG. 26, the jackpot determination value A is set to the jackpot determination value A in the jackpot determination process.

  In this embodiment, when controlled to the probability variation state, as described above, the probability that the display result of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 becomes the first special symbol specific display result, the first normal symbol display 12, the probability that the display result of the normal symbol in 12 is a win, the probability that the display result of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 9 becomes the second special symbol specific display result, and the normal symbol in the second normal symbol display 13 The probability that the display result is a hit is increased. Then, when the display result of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 or the second special symbol display 9 becomes a non-probable variation big hit symbol, or during the certain variation state, the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined number of times. Sometimes the probabilistic state ends.

  First, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S101). If the probability variation flag is set in S101, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the probability variation jackpot end command is set in the pointer (S102). If the probability variation flag is not set in S101, the response corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot termination command is set. The address of the command transmission table is set in the pointer (S103). The probability variation jackpot end command and the non-probability variation jackpot end command set in S102 and S103 are transmitted to the effect control board 90 in the decorative symbol command control process (S28). When the production control microcomputer 118 receives the probability variation big hit end command, it performs display control to end the probability variation big hit on the first decoration variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k, and receives the non-probability variation big hit end command. Then, display control for ending the uncertain variation big hit is performed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k.

  Next, after the first big hit execution flag is reset (S104), the interruption flag set in the second special symbol change process in the second special symbol process (S27) is reset (S105), and the first big hit The flag is reset (S106). Then, in the second special symbol variation process in which the same process as the first special symbol variation process of FIG. 28 is performed, the variation display of the second special symbol suspended as described above due to the occurrence of the first big hit is resumed. (S106a). Specifically, a drive signal for restarting the variable display of the second special symbol that is performing the variable display on the second special symbol display 9 is set, and the drive signal is the special symbol display control process (S34) of FIG. Is output. Further, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the restart command is set in the pointer (S107). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S200) (S108). A process of starting the variation of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 9 by executing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process (S25) by resetting the first big hit execution flag in S104. Then, the second special symbol variation process is executed, and a special symbol process timer subtraction process for measuring the variation time of the special symbol becomes executable. Further, the restart command set in S107 is a command for instructing restart of the variation display of the second decorative symbol suspended in the second decorative variation display portion 9k, and the decorative symbol command control process (S28 in FIG. 16). ) To the effect control board 90. When receiving the restart command, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs control to restart the display of the variation of the second decorative symbol in the second ornament variation display unit 9k.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in S30 in FIG. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process. First, when detection signals from various winning ball detection switches such as the first start port switch 62 are turned on, the total number of winning balls stored in the game control microcomputer 99 according to the type of the switch. The award ball number adding process (S271) for adding and updating is executed. Then, a prize ball for performing control relating to the prize ball payout, such as setting data for outputting a prize ball control signal for requesting the prize ball payout to be added and updated in S271 in the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55. A control process (S272) is executed. Then, a process of outputting the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 to the port 0, such as outputting a prize ball control signal, is performed (S273).

  Next, a method for sending a control command transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 will be described. FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the effect control command (specifically, the effect control signal constituting the effect control command) has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification). The second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing how to send the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 33, the 8-bit effect control signal of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 90 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control means, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a capture signal that triggers the capture of the effect control signal.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 118 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the production control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable, for example, in accordance with the first and second bytes of the production control signal. The effect control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. Note that the effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 90. The effect control command corresponds to a display control command for instructing display control of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, and controls a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 40 (lamp control). And a function of a sound control command for instructing sound control for controlling sound output from the speaker 27.

  Referring to FIG. 34, the variation pattern command includes a first variation pattern command and a second variation pattern command, and the variation pattern of the ornament pattern in each of first ornament variation display portion 8k and second ornament variation display portion 9k. This is an effect control command to be specified. The variation pattern command displays the variation display result of the decorative symbol in each of the first decorative variation display unit 8k and the second decorative variation display unit 9k. It is also a command for instructing which one to use. The variation pattern command is also a command for instructing the start of variation of the decorative symbols in each of the first ornament variation display unit 8k and the second ornament variation display unit 9k.

  The stop symbol command includes a first stop symbol command and a second stop symbol command, and is a command for designating a stop symbol type of the ornament symbol in each of the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k. .

  The symbol stop command includes a first symbol stop command and a second symbol stop command, and is a command for instructing stoppage of the decorative symbol variation display in each of the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k. .

  The pre-determination result command includes a first pre-determination result command and a second pre-determination result command, and the display result of the decorative pattern at the time of starting winning for each of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k. Is a command for instructing the prior judgment result.

  The payout prohibition command is a command for instructing to display a payout prohibition state. As described above, when a different error state signal corresponding to the type of error is input to the game control microcomputer 99, a payout prohibiting command corresponding to the error state signal is input to the effect control microcomputer 118. You may make it do. Thereby, the notification display according to the kind of error can be performed.

  The recovery command is a command indicating that the recovery process is executed when the recovery process is executed based on the data stored in the backup RAM when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. If the restoration control command is not received within a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the performance control microcomputer 118 determines that the initialization process has been performed, and will be described later. The history data stored in the RAM backup area of the effect control microcomputer 118 is initialized, and a predetermined initial screen is displayed on the first decoration variation display section 8k and the second decoration variation display section 9k. Further, when the recovery control microcomputer 118 receives a recovery command within a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the RAM area of the presentation control microcomputer 118 as described later is used. The history data stored in is used to restore the game history information without being initialized, and the restoration process has been executed in the first ornament variation display portion 8k or the second ornament variation display portion 9k. A screen for notification is displayed.

  The first payout number command is a command transmitted to indicate that four payouts are performed when four payouts are made in accordance with the winning of the game ball. The second payout number command is a command transmitted to indicate that 7 payouts are made when 7 payouts are made in accordance with a winning game ball. The third payout number command is a command transmitted to indicate that 15 payouts are made when 15 payouts are made in accordance with the winning of the game ball. After the game control microcomputer 99 transmits the award ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 660, the first payout number command indicates the same number as the payout number specified by the award ball number command at a predetermined timing. Any one of the third payout number commands is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 118 as an effect control command.

  The demonstration display command includes a first demonstration display command and a second demonstration display command. The first demonstration display command executes a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as a demo display) on the first decoration change display unit 8k when the change display is not executed on the first change display unit for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). It is a command to instruct that. The second demonstration display command is a command for instructing execution of demonstration display on the second decoration variation display unit 9k when variation display is not performed on the second variation display unit for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). .

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the effect control board 90 to the voice frame lamp board 92 will be described. Referring to FIG. 9 described above, when the production control microcomputer 118 receives the production control command from the main board 120, the first decoration variation display section 8 k and the second decoration change display unit 8 k and the second are displayed by the lamp such as the game effect lamp 40 and the speaker 27. A lamp control command and a voice control command are transmitted to the voice frame lamp board 92 in order to produce a presentation synchronized with the presentation presentation by the decoration variation display section 9k.

  When the lamp control command and the voice control command are transmitted from the effect control board 90 to the voice frame lamp board 92, the presentation control microcomputer 118 and the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a perform bidirectional communication. The effect control microcomputer 118 outputs a lamp control command (or a voice control command consisting of a voice control signal) including a 1-byte lamp control signal transmitted through, for example, eight signal lines, and a lamp control REQ signal ( Or, the voice control REQ signal) is turned on. When the sound frame lamp control microcomputer 92a takes in the lamp control signal (or sound control signal), it outputs a one-pulse lamp control response signal (or sound control response signal). When the effect control microcomputer 118 detects that the lamp control response signal (or voice control response signal) is turned off after being turned on, the lamp control REQ signal (or voice control REQ signal) is turned off. To. Note that such a control command transmission method is an example, and other transmission methods may be used as long as the lamp control command and the voice control command are transmitted from the effect control board 90 to the voice frame lamp board 92 by bidirectional communication. May be used.

  Next, the game shop information screen and the player information screen displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration variation display portion 9k will be described. After the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game shop information screen is displayed in a normal state in which the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k can display the ornament symbols in a variable manner. In other words, it is an image that is displayed at the time of start-up, and is an image that displays various types of information for managers such as store staff of a game store (game room) where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The information screen for the player is an image that can be displayed in a normal state in which the first ornament variation display unit 8k and the second ornament variation display unit 9k can vary and display the ornament design, and the player is the target user. It is an image displaying various information.

  The game shop information screen is displayed on one of the predetermined variation display portions of the first decoration variation display portion 8k and the second decoration variation display portion 9k. For example, in this embodiment, an information screen for a game store is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. The game shop information screen may be displayed on the second decoration variation display portion 9k. The game store information screen includes a game store menu screen, a history data clear screen, and an option screen. The history data clear screen is a screen that enables an operation (initialization operation) for initializing (deleting data) history data indicating the history of games played in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Here, the history data is collected by the effect control microcomputer 118, stored in the RAM backup area of the effect control microcomputer 118, and provided for displaying game history information as described later. This history data can be used continuously at the time of recovery after a power failure. Further, the option screen can manage whether or not to display each of a plurality of types of game histories displayed using history data when the player menu screen is displayed (display / non-display). This is a possible screen. The game shop menu screen is a screen that displays the items described above that can be executed on the game shop information screen in a menu format.

  As the game store information screen, first, a game store menu screen is displayed, and the history data clear screen and the option screen are displayed from the game store menu screen in accordance with the selection operation and determination operation by the operation key-190. Move to one of the displays.

  FIG. 35 is a display screen diagram showing a game shop menu screen displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. As shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 35, on the game shop menu screen, a message display section 440 for displaying a message related to the game shop menu screen is displayed, and an operation including an image of a button icon. As the buttons, a history data clear button 441, an option button 442, and a return button 443 are displayed. On the amusement shop menu screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the game shop menu screen, the history data clear button 441 is displayed in a frame. On the game shop menu screen, the button selected by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193 on the operation key 190 as shown in FIG. The display that surrounds the frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  In the message display unit 440, a message indicating that it is possible when the selected button is operated is displayed. For example, when the history data clear button 441 is selected, a message “Clear history data such as the number of big hits” is displayed as shown in FIG. When the option button 442 is selected, a message “You can select items to be viewed and displayed to the player” is displayed as shown in (b). When the return button 443 is selected, a message “return to gaming state” is displayed as shown in (c). As a result, the operator can easily grasp the function of each button.

  When the enter key 191 is operated with the history data clear button 441 selected as shown in FIG. 35A, the display of the first decoration variation display portion 8k is shown in FIG. Move to the history data clear screen. When the enter key 191 is operated with the option button 442 selected as shown in FIG. 35B, the display on the first decoration variation display portion 8k is shown in FIG. 36C described later. Move to the option screen. Further, when the enter key 191 is operated with the return button 443 selected as shown in FIG. 35C, the display of the first decoration variation display portion 8k is changed to the normal gaming state (decoration display variation display). Transition to a display screen (normal game screen) in a state where execution is possible.

  FIG. 36 is a display screen diagram showing a history data clear screen and an option screen displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. In FIG. 36, the history data clear screen is shown in (a) and (b), and the option screen is shown in (c). As shown in FIG. 36 (a), on the history data clear screen, a message display section 444 for displaying a message relating to initialization of history data is displayed, and a yes button is used as an operation button made up of a button icon image. 445 and No button 446 are displayed.

  On the history data clear screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. In the display start stage of the option screen, a display in which the Yes button 445 is surrounded by a frame is performed. On the option screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button with a frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed. At the stage of shifting to the history data clear screen, a message “history data will be cleared” is displayed on the message display unit 444. Then, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193 with the operation key 190, a display surrounding the selected button with a frame is performed. This indicates which button is selected. When the OK key 191 is operated while the Yes button 445 is selected, the history data stored in the backup in the RAM is initialized (cleared), and a message is displayed as shown in FIG. By displaying the message “Cleared” on the display unit 444, it is notified that the history data has been initialized, and then the screen returns to the amusement shop menu screen shown in FIG. Operating the enter key 191 in such a situation is called an initialization operation. In addition, after it is notified that the history data has been initialized, the first decoration variation display unit 8k may be controlled to shift to the normal game screen.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (c), on the option screen, as the operation buttons made up of button icon images, the jackpot information management button 448a, the presentation introduction management button 448b, the jackpot probability management button 448c, and the start winning ratio management button 448d, jackpot ratio management button 448e, and slump graph management button 448f are displayed, and a return button 452 is displayed. The jackpot information is the jackpot information such as the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed while the jackpot gaming state occurs. The production introduction is information that introduces the presentation of variable display such as a jackpot notice and reach. Here, the jackpot notice refers to notifying that the jackpot gaming state will occur, and includes the notice when the jackpot gaming state actually occurs and the notice when the jackpot gaming state does not actually occur . Reach means that special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for symbols that have not been stopped when the symbols that have been stopped constitute part of the jackpot symbol, and all or A state in which some symbols are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol. The jackpot probability is information indicating the probability that a jackpot gaming state will occur.

  The start winning ratio is information indicating a ratio between the number of start winnings displayed by variably displaying the first variation display unit and the number of starting winnings displayed by variably displaying the second variation display unit. The jackpot ratio is information indicating the ratio between the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming state based on the variation display in the first variation display section and the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming state based on the variation display in the second variation display section. is there. The slump graph is information indicating the number of difference balls according to the time transition in a graph format. The difference ball number is the difference between the prize ball paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball supplied to the hitting ball launcher 130.

  On the option screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the option screen, a display that surrounds the jackpot information management button 448a with a frame is performed. On the option screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button with a frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  The decision key 191 is operated for each of the jackpot information management button 448a, the presentation introduction management button 448b, the jackpot probability management button 448c, the start winning ratio management button 448d, the jackpot ratio management button 448e, and the slump graph management button 448f. Each time, one of a character “ON” indicating display and a character “OFF” indicating non-display is displayed. With respect to the selected button, each time the enter key 191 is operated, a character “ON” indicating that the button is displayed and a character “OFF” indicating that the button is not displayed are alternately displayed. The For each button, when the character “ON” is displayed, the game history information indicated by the button is set to be displayed. When the character “OFF” is displayed, the game history indicated by the button is displayed. Settings are made so that information cannot be displayed. When the enter key 191 is operated with the return button 452 selected, the screen returns to the amusement shop menu screen shown in FIG.

  Next, the player information screen will be specifically described. The player information screen includes a player menu screen, a jackpot information screen, an effect introduction screen, a jackpot probability screen, a start winning ratio screen, a jackpot ratio screen, and a slump graph screen. The jackpot information screen is a screen that displays the jackpot information described above. The effect introduction screen is a screen for displaying the effect introduction described above. The jackpot probability screen is a screen that displays information on the jackpot probability described above. The start winning ratio screen is a screen for displaying the information of the starting winning ratio described above. The jackpot ratio screen is a screen that displays the information of the jackpot ratio described above. The slump graph screen is a screen that displays information on the slump graph described above.

  In the player information screen, a condition that the variable display is not performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) on the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit is satisfied, and the player information screen is displayed. Can be displayed when an operation is performed. The player information screen is displayed on any one of the decorative symbol display units selected from the first decorative variation display unit 8k and the second decorative variation display unit 9k. More specifically, when the condition that the variation display has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) is established only for the first variation display portion, the first decoration variation display portion 8k corresponding to the first variation display portion is displayed. The player information screen is displayed on the side. On the other hand, when the condition that the variable display has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) is established only for the second variable display unit, the game is performed on the second decoration variable display unit 9k side corresponding to the second variable display unit. The user information screen is displayed. Further, when the condition that the variable display has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) is established for both the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit, it corresponds to one predetermined variable display unit. An information screen for the player is displayed on the side of the decoration variation display section (in the case of the present embodiment, the first decoration variation display section 8k).

  As the player information screen, first, a player menu screen is displayed, and in response to a selection operation and a determination operation using the operation keys 190, a bonus game information screen, an effect introduction screen, a jackpot are displayed from the game store menu screen. The display shifts to one of a probability screen, a start winning ratio screen, a jackpot ratio screen, and a slump graph screen.

  FIG. 37 is a display screen diagram showing a player menu screen displayed on one of the decorative symbol variation display portions selected from the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k. When the condition that variation display on at least one variation display portion of the first variation display portion and the second variation display portion is not performed for a predetermined period (20 seconds) is established, the first decoration variation display portion 8k and The player information screen can be displayed on one of the decorative symbol variation display portions selected from the second ornament variation display portion 9k. More specifically, when the variation display is not performed for a predetermined period (20 seconds) only on the first variation display portion side, the player information screen is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k side. Can be performed. On the other hand, when the variation display is not performed for a predetermined period (20 seconds) only on the second variation display portion side, the player information screen can be displayed on the second decoration variation display portion 9k side. It becomes. When the variation display is not performed for a predetermined period (20 seconds) in both the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit, the player information screen is displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k side. Display can be performed.

  When the condition that the fluctuation display on at least one of the first fluctuation display section and the second fluctuation display section is not performed for a predetermined period (20 seconds) is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. As described above, on one of the decorative pattern variation display units selected from the first decorative variation display unit 8k and the second decorative variation display unit 9k, A valid button 453 that enables the display of the information screen for the person is displayed.

  The valid button 453 is an operation button including a button icon image. The screen on which such an effective button 453 is displayed corresponds to an operation screen on which the operation of the operation key 190 is enabled. When the enter key 191 is operated with the valid button 453 selected as shown in FIG. 37 (a), the selection is made from the first decoration change display part 8k and the second decoration change display part 9k as described above. The player's menu shown in (b) of FIG. 37 is displayed from the screen on which one of the displayed decorative symbol variation display sections displays decorative symbols 8a to 8c (9a to 9c) as shown in (a) of FIG. Move to the screen.

  On the player menu screen, a message display unit 454 for displaying a message related to the player menu screen is displayed, and as the operation buttons composed of button icon images, a big hit information button 455a, an effect introduction button 455b, a big hit A probability button 455c, a start winning ratio button 455d, a big hit ratio button 455e, a slump graph button 455f, and a return button 459 are displayed. On the player menu screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the player menu screen, a display that surrounds the jackpot information button 455a with a frame is performed. On the player menu screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button in the frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  Further, in the message display unit 454, a message indicating that it becomes possible when the selected button is operated is displayed. For example, when the jackpot information button 455a is selected, a message “A jackpot symbol and the number of fluctuations are displayed” is displayed as shown in FIG. As a result, the operator can easily grasp the function of each button.

  When the enter key 191 is operated with the jackpot information button 455a selected as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration on which the player menu screen is displayed. The display on the fluctuation display portion 9k shifts to a jackpot information screen shown in FIG. In addition, when the enter key 191 is operated in a state where the effect introduction button 455b is selected, the display on the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration variation display portion 9k on which the player menu screen is displayed is displayed. Then, the screen shifts to an effect introduction screen shown in FIG. Further, when the determination key 191 is operated with the big hit probability button 455c selected, the display on the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration variation display portion 9k on which the player menu screen is displayed is displayed. Then, the screen shifts to a jackpot probability screen shown in FIG.

  Further, when the enter key 191 is operated with the start winning ratio button 455d being selected, the display on the first ornament variation display portion 8k or the second ornament variation display portion 9k on which the player menu screen is displayed. However, the screen shifts to a start winning ratio screen shown in FIG. Further, when the determination key 191 is operated with the big hit ratio button 455e selected, the display on the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration variation display portion 9k on which the player menu screen is displayed is displayed. Then, the screen shifts to a jackpot winning ratio screen shown in FIG. In addition, when the enter key 191 is operated while the slump graph button 455f is selected, the display on the first decoration variation display portion 8k or the second decoration variation display portion 9k on which the player menu screen is displayed is displayed. Then, the screen shifts to a slump graph screen shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram showing a jackpot information screen, an effect introduction screen, and a jackpot probability screen displayed on the first decoration variation display section 8k or the second decoration variation display section 9k. In FIG. 38, (a) shows a jackpot information screen, (b) shows an effect introduction screen, and (c) shows a jackpot probability screen.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), on the jackpot information screen, every time a jackpot gaming state occurs, it is derived and displayed as a variation display result on the first ornament variation display portion 8k or the second ornament variation display portion 9k. And the first variation display section and the second during the occurrence of the big hit game state (when the first big hit game state after power-on, until the first big hit game state occurs after power-on) The number of times the variable display is performed in the variable display unit (the number of times of big hit variation display) is associated, and the big hit information table 460 is displayed according to the occurrence order of the big hit gaming state. Further, a return button 461 is displayed on the big hit information screen. On the big hit information screen, the return button 461 is always displayed in a frame. When the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (b), on the effect introduction screen, as operation buttons including button icon images, a notice button 462, an A reach button 463, a B reach button 464, an appearance character button 465, and a return button 466 are displayed. Is displayed. Here, the A reach is a specific reach among a plurality of predetermined reach types, and the B reach is a predetermined reach other than the A reach. The appearance character is a character that appears (displays) in the variation display on the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k. On this effect display player menu screen, the selected button is displayed surrounded by a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the stage of starting the display of the effect introduction screen, the notice button 462 is displayed in a frame. On the effect introduction screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button with a frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  When the enter key 191 is operated while the notice button 462 is selected, an image introducing the effect display when the big hit notice is performed is displayed on the decoration variation display portion on which the effect display player menu screen is displayed. Is displayed. When the enter key 191 is operated while the A reach button 463 is selected, an image introducing the effect display in the A reach is displayed on the decoration variation display portion on which the effect display player menu screen is displayed. The When the enter key 191 is operated while the B reach button 464 is selected, an image introducing the effect display in the B reach is displayed on the decoration variation display portion on which the effect display player menu screen is displayed. The When the enter key 191 is operated while the appearance character button 465 is selected, an image introducing the appearance character is displayed on the decoration variation display section on which the effect display player menu screen is displayed. When the enter key 191 is operated while the return button 466 is selected, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (c), on the jackpot probability screen, a jackpot probability table 467 is shown in which the design value of the jackpot occurrence probability for the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the measured value of the jackpot occurrence probability are arranged in a table format. And a return button 468 are displayed. Here, the actual value of the occurrence probability of the big hit is calculated by the first control display 118 until the big hit is generated by the effect control microcomputer 118 for the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation display portion and the second fluctuation display portion. The number of fluctuation displays executed in the second fluctuation display section is counted every time a fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command and second fluctuation pattern command) is received, and the fluctuation display result is a combination of jackpot symbols. It is obtained by calculating the reciprocal of the counted number of fluctuation displays by calculation when the fluctuation pattern command is received, and is stored in the RAM and used for the actual value of the jackpot occurrence probability. On the big hit probability screen, the return button 468 is always surrounded by a frame, and when the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a display screen diagram showing a start winning ratio screen, a jackpot ratio screen, and a slump graph screen displayed on the first decoration variation display section 8k or the second decoration variation display section 9k.

  FIG. 39A shows a start winning ratio screen. As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the start winning ratio screen shows the ratio between the start winning number obtained by variably displaying the first variation display section and the starting winning number obtained by variably displaying the second variation display section. A start winning ratio circle graph 481 which is a pie graph is displayed, and a return button 471 is displayed. In this start winning ratio circle graph 481, numerical data indicating a specific starting winning ratio is also displayed. The start winning ratio circle graph 481 is created using the following data. By counting the number of first variation pattern commands received by the effect control microcomputer 118, data of the number of winning prizes obtained by variably displaying the first variation display section is obtained. Further, by counting the number of second variation pattern commands received by the effect control microcomputer 118, data of the number of winning prizes obtained by variably displaying the second variation display section is obtained. Then, by calculating the ratio of these count values, data indicating the ratio between the number of starting prizes displayed by variably displaying the first variation display section and the number of starting prizes variably displayed by the second variation display section is obtained. Based on the obtained ratio data, a start winning ratio circle graph 481 is created. In the start winning ratio screen, the return button 471 is always surrounded by a frame. When the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  FIG. 39B shows a big hit ratio screen. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), on the jackpot ratio screen, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state based on the variation display on the first variation display portion and the jackpot gaming state based on the variation display on the second variation display portion. A jackpot ratio pie chart 482, which is a pie chart showing the ratio to the number of occurrences, is displayed and a return button 472 is displayed.

  In the jackpot ratio circle graph 482, numerical data indicating a specific jackpot ratio is also displayed. The jackpot ratio pie chart 482 is created using the following data. Out of the first stop symbol commands received by the production control microcomputer 118, the number of probable variation big hit symbol commands and non-probability variable big hit symbol commands is counted, thereby making a big hit game based on the variation display in the first variation display section. Data on the number of occurrences of the state is obtained. In addition, among the second stop symbol commands received by the effect control microcomputer 118, the number of the probable variation big hit symbol commands and the non-probable big hit symbol commands are counted, thereby being based on the variation display in the second variation display unit. Data on the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state is obtained. Then, by calculating the ratio of these count values, the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display in the first fluctuation display section and the big hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display in the second fluctuation display section. Data indicating the ratio to the number of occurrences is obtained, and a big hit ratio pie chart 482 is created based on the ratio data. On the big hit ratio screen, the return button 472 is always surrounded by a frame. When the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG. In the case of the present embodiment, since it is possible to specify whether or not the variation pattern command uses the display result as the big hit symbol, the data for the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state is not the stop symbol command but the fluctuation pattern. A command may be used.

  FIG. 39 (c) shows a slump graph screen. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the slump graph screen, the vertical axis represents the number of difference balls (the number of prize balls—the number supplied to the hitting ball launcher), and the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time. A slump graph 469 indicating the transition of the number of difference balls is displayed, and a return button 470 is displayed. Here, the difference ball number used in the slump graph 469 is determined by the effect control microcomputer 118 counting the number of prize balls based on the received first to third prize ball number commands, and the shot ball sensor 194. The number of supplied balls to the hitting ball launching device 130 is counted based on the detection signal from the ball, and the difference ball count is calculated by subtracting the count value of the supplied ball number from the count value of the award ball number at a predetermined time interval. It is obtained by execution, stored in RAM, and used to display a slump graph. In the slump graph screen, the return button 470 is always surrounded by a frame. When the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 118 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 118. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the effect control microcomputer 118 starts effect control main processing. In the effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 118 first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like. This is performed (S601). However, since the history data described above can be initialized when the game store information screen is displayed as described above, the initialization is not executed at this stage.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a recovery command has been received (S602). When the recovery command is received, the process proceeds to S606 described later. On the other hand, when the recovery command is not received, the command determination counter is decremented by 1 (S603). Here, the command determination counter is a time measuring means for counting the elapsed time from when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the production control microcomputer 118 receives the reset signal, A count value corresponding to a predetermined time is set at the time of execution of the initialization process described above, and is counted down every time S603 is executed. The predetermined time set as the time measured by the command determination counter is set to, for example, the longest time during which a recovery command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 118 does not receive the recovery command before the time measured by the command determination counter ends, it is determined that the game control microcomputer 99 has executed the initialization process instead of the recovery process. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the command determination counter is “0” (S604). In other words, in S604, it is determined whether or not a time during which a recovery command may be transmitted has elapsed. When the value of the command determination counter is not “0”, the process returns to S602 and the above-described processing is repeatedly executed. As described above, a recovery command input determination process for determining whether or not a recovery command is input within a predetermined time from when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed through S602 to S604.

  When a recovery command is received while the recovery command input determination process is being performed, a game history recovery process that enables display of the game history based on the history data stored in backup as described above is performed (S606). . On the other hand, when the recovery command is not received while the recovery command input determination processing is being performed and it is determined that the command determination counter has become “0”, the above-described game shop information screen is displayed and stored as a backup. Initialization data management processing that enables the history data to be initialized is executed (S605). The contents of the initialization data management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game history recovery process or the initialization data management process ends, the effect control microcomputer 118 monitors the timer interrupt flag (S607). When a timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 118 sets “1” as the value of the timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If “1” is set as the value of the timer interrupt flag in S607, the effect control microcomputer 118 clears the value of the timer interrupt flag (S608), and executes the following effect control process.

  A timer interrupt occurs every 33 ms, for example. That is, the effect control process is activated every 33 ms, for example. Further, in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment, only the process of setting “1” as the value of the timer interrupt flag is performed, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process. The effect control process may be executed.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 118 first clears the timer interrupt flag and executes a power-off process for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output (S609). The contents of the power-off process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes command analysis processing for analyzing the received effect control command (S610). Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs a first effect control process (S611). The contents of the first effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the first effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first decorative symbol display unit 8k is included. Perform production control. Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs a second effect control process (S612). In the second effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second decorative symbol display unit 9k is included. Perform production control.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 118 inputs operation signals from the operation keys 190 including the enter key 191, the up direction key 192, and the down direction key 193 via the input port 669, and further, the audio frame described above. Data input processing for inputting a response signal (lamp control response signal, voice control response signal, etc.) from the lamp control microcomputer 92a through the input / output port 671 is executed (S613). In the present embodiment, the peripheral command relay board 57 provided on the signal path between the main board 120 and the effect control board 90 is provided with a unidirectional circuit 57a. Therefore, a signal from the effect control board 90, a signal input to the effect control board 90 (an operation signal from the operation key 190 and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194), and a voice frame lamp connected to the effect control board 90 A signal from the board 92 (a board not connected to the main board 120 such as a peripheral board) is not transmitted to the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120 due to the presence of the peripheral command relay board 57. Therefore, the signal input path from the outside to the game control microcomputer 99 is limited, and the possibility of an illegal act of sending an illegal signal to the game control microcomputer 99 can be reduced.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 118 collects game data necessary for displaying information such as the game history information as described above, and creates history data indicating the game history and stores it in the RAM. The game data collecting process to be executed is executed (S614). The contents of the game data collection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 118 executes a random number update process for updating a predetermined random counter (S615). In the random number update process, for example, a random counter RS used to determine the effect of the variable display effect display of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and a combination of the decorative symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result are used. Random counters RU-1 to RU3 are updated. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in S607. An INT signal for effect control from the main board 120 is input to the interrupt terminal of the microcomputer 118 for effect control. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 120 is turned on, a timer interrupt is generated in the production control microcomputer 118. Then, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes effect control command reception processing in the interrupt processing. In the effect control command reception process, the effect control microcomputer 118 stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the initialization data management process in S605 of FIG. The effect control microcomputer 118 executes initialization data management processing as follows.

  First, a game shop menu screen as shown in FIG. 35A is displayed (S421). Then, the history data initialization operation is validated (S421a). For example, in S421a, an initialization operation enable flag indicating that the history data initialization operation is permitted is set, and history data in the RAM is initialized in a state where the initialization operation enable flag is not set. The program is controlled not to start. Next, it is determined whether any one of the history data clear button 441, the option button 442, and the return button 443 has been operated (S422). Such a determination is repeatedly performed until the operation button is operated. However, although illustration is omitted here, when any of the operation buttons is not operated for a predetermined period, the initialization data management processing ends and the process returns. If it is determined that any one of the operation buttons has been operated, data processing and image display corresponding to the operation of the operation button are executed (S423). That is, in accordance with the operation of the operation button, for example, data processing such as initialization of history data, setting of display / non-display of game history information, and setting of data necessary for image display is executed. At the same time, various images as described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36 are displayed. In the state where S422 and S423 are executed, the history data initialization operation is validated. Therefore, when the history data initialization operation is performed, a program for initializing the history data in the RAM is executed. The history data in the RAM is initialized.

  Next, in the operation button operation determined in S422, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of the return button 443 on the game shop menu screen, that is, an operation of ending the game shop menu screen (S424). If it is determined that there is no end operation, the process returns to S422 and the above-described processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there has been an end operation, the history data initialization operation is invalidated (S425). For example, in S425, the initialization operation validation flag is reset, and control is performed so that the program for initializing the history data in the RAM is not started in the subsequent processing. Although not shown here, the initialization operation validation flag is also reset when the initialization data management process ends when any of the operation buttons is not operated for a predetermined period as described above. Then, the initialization data management process ends, and the process returns. In the initialization data management process, it is possible to determine whether or not an effect control command indicating that a winning such as a variation pattern command has been received is received. The operation enable flag may be reset to end the initialization data management process.

  Such initialization data management processing is processing that can initialize history data. As described above, the initialization data management process is executed when the recovery command is not transmitted within a predetermined period, that is, when the initialization process is executed by the game control microcomputer 99. . In other words, the initialization data management process is executed on the condition that the initialization process is executed in response to the operation of the clear switch 921 by an administrator such as a game shop clerk when the power is turned on. It becomes. For this reason, the initialization of the history data that can be performed in the initialization data management process is performed by the clear switch 921 existing on the rear surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that cannot be easily operated by the player during a normal game. This is a prerequisite. For this reason, it is prevented that a player initializes game history data without permission.

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing an example of the power-off processing in S609 of FIG. The effect control microcomputer 118 performs the following process in the power-off process. First, it is confirmed whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in an on state) (S301). If not in the on state, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM provided in the effect control board 90 is cleared to 0 (S302). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM is increased by 1 (S303). If the value of the backup monitoring timer coincides with a determination value (for example, 2) (S304), the power supply stop process after S305 is executed. That is, the state shifts from the state in which the effect control is executed to the state in which the power supply stop process (power-off control process) for saving the control state of the effect control is executed.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even if the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Therefore, in the effect control main process, it can be confirmed that the process result of the power supply stop process is stored when the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, parity data is created (S305 to S314). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (S305), and a checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (S306). Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (S307).

  Next, an exclusive OR between the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (S308). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (S309), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (S310), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (S311). Then, the processing of S308 to S311 is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (S312).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the value of each bit in the contents of the checksum data area is inverted (S313). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (S314). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (S315). Thereafter, the RAM provided in the production control microcomputer 118 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM provided in the effect control microcomputer 118 is set to the pointer (S316). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (ie, the number of processes) is loaded (S317). Further, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (S318), and the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the output port address) is loaded (S319). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (S320), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (S321). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (S322). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (S323), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to S318 (S324). If the number of processes is 0 (Y in S324), that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (S325) and the loop process is started.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (S326). When the power-off signal is turned off, the power-on execution address (address of S401) is set as the return address, the return instruction is executed (S329), the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, Return to the main process.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the reset signal is in a low level on state (S327). When the reset signal is turned on, the production control microcomputer 118 enters a system reset state (system reset). That is, the production control microcomputer 118 is returned to the operation stop state, which is the start state. In this example, the production control microcomputer 118 turns on the reset signal so as to be actively stopped when a voltage higher than the drive voltage (for example, 4 V) is still supplied. The voltage level of the detection voltage is set.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop process is executed, and the data (specified value with backup and checksum) indicating that the power supply stop process is executed is stored in the backup RAM. Then, the RAM access is prohibited, the output port is cleared, and the timer interrupt for executing the payout control process is set to the prohibited state.

  As described above, in the production control microcomputer 118, the data for returning the history data to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped is reliably stored in the RAM. Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, if the power is restored within a predetermined period, the history data can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped. In addition, a part of the RAM (an area for storing history data) may not be backed up by power, but the entire area of the RAM may be backed up by power.

  Next, the command analysis processing in S610 of FIG. 40 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart for explaining command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not there is a reception command in the command reception buffer (S621). If there is no reception command, the process returns. On the other hand, when there is a reception command, the reception command is read (S622). The command data read here is erased in the command reception buffer. Whether or not the read received command is a stop symbol command (either the first stop symbol command or the second stop symbol command) that designates a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol). Is determined (S623). If it is a stop symbol command, the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol command is determined based on the value of the random symbol RU-1 to RU-3 for determining the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol (S624).

  Specifically, in S624, a combination of stop symbols of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is determined as follows. First, the values of RU-1 to RU-3 are extracted. When a probability variation jackpot symbol command is received as a stop symbol command, the RU-1 value and the probability variation jackpot symbol (odd decoration symbol) are used to determine the relationship between the value of RU-1 and the probability variation jackpot symbol determination data table. The corresponding probability variation jackpot symbol is selected from the extracted value of −1, and the combination of the probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the combination of the decorative symbol stop symbols. Further, when a non-probable big hit symbol command is received as a stop symbol command, a data table for determining non-probable big hit symbols in which the relationship between the value of RU-1 and the non-probable big hit symbol (even number of decorative symbols) is predetermined is used. Then, the corresponding non-probable variation jackpot symbol is selected from the extracted value of RU-1, and the combination of the non-probable variation jackpot symbol is determined as the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when a reach failure symbol command is received as a stop symbol command, a corresponding relationship between the value of RU-1 and the reach symbol is determined from the extracted value of RU-1, using a predetermined reach symbol determination data table. A reach symbol is selected, and a combination of the reach symbols is determined as a combination of stop symbols (reach symbols) of the left and right decoration symbols. Then, using the center ornament design determination data table in which the relationship between the predetermined RU-2 and the center ornament design is predetermined, the corresponding center ornament design is selected from the extracted value of RU-2. However, when the center ornament symbol corresponding to the extracted value of RU-2 matches the reach symbol, correction is performed to change the center ornament symbol so that it does not match the reach symbol. When a non-reach off symbol command is received as a stop symbol command, a left ornament symbol determination data table in which the relationship between the value of RU-1 and the left ornament symbol is predetermined, the value of RU-2, and the center ornament symbol RU-1 to RU-1 to RU-1 are used by using a middle ornament symbol determination data table in which the relationship between the RU-3 and the right ornament symbol is determined in advance. A corresponding decorative design is selected from each of the extracted values of 3, and the combination of the decorative design is determined as a combination of the stop design of the decorative design. However, when the combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the extracted values of RU-1 to RU-3 match, correction is performed to change the inner decorative symbols so as not to match.

  Then, the symbol number of the stop symbol of each decorative symbol determined in S624 is stored in each symbol stop storage area (S625), and the first stop symbol command reception flag or the second stop as the valid flag corresponding to the received command is stored. The symbol command reception flag is set (ON) (S626), and the process returns to S621. Here, the valid flag is a flag indicating what command is effectively received. Data of various flags used in the effect control microcomputer 118 such as an effective flag is stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 118 and updated.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not each symbol designating command in S623 described above, it is determined whether the received command is a variation pattern command (first variation pattern or second variation pattern) (S627). If the received command is a variation pattern command, the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag as a valid flag corresponding to the received command is set (S628), and whether or not the probability variation state has ended. Probability change end determination processing (S629) is performed, and then the process returns to S621. The contents of the probability variation end determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S627 described above, if the received command is not a variation pattern command, it is determined whether the received command is the above-described prior determination result command (first preliminary determination result command or second preliminary determination result command) ( S630). When the received command is a prior determination result command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first prior determination result command among the prior determination result commands (S631). When it is determined that the command is not the first pre-judgment result command, that is, when the command is the second pre-judgment result command, the first notice effect determination process for performing the process related to the notice effect performed by the first decoration variation display unit 8k is executed. Then (S632), the process returns to S621. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command is the first prior determination result command, a second notice effect determination process for executing a process related to the notice effect performed by the second decoration variation display unit 9k is executed (S633), and the process returns to S621.

  If it is determined in S630 that the received command is not a pre-determination result command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a demonstration display command (first demonstration display command or second demonstration display command) (S634). ). If the received command is a demonstration display command, the first demonstration display command reception flag or the second demonstration display command reception flag as a valid flag corresponding to the received command is set (S635), and then the process returns to S621.

  If it is determined in S634 that the received command is not a demonstration display command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout number command (any one of the first to third payout number commands) ( S636). If the received command is a payout number command, first to third payout number command reception flags are set as valid flags corresponding to the type of the received command (S637), and then the process returns to S621.

  If it is determined in S636 that the received command is not a payout number command (if it is another command other than the command described above), it is determined what other received command is, and the received command corresponds to the received command. The valid flag is set (S638), and the process returns to S621. That is, S638 collectively describes processing corresponding to reception of various commands other than the stop symbol command, the variation pattern command, and the determination result command described above.

  Next, the probability variation end determination process in S629 of FIG. 44 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart for explaining the probability variation end determination process.

  It is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) is a probability variation pattern command used in the first state as shown in FIG. 9C (S401). ). If it is determined that the command is a probability variation pattern command, a probability variation flag that is a flag indicating that the control is in the first state is set (S402), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command is not the probability variation pattern command, that is, when the variation pattern command determined by looking up (a) or (b) in FIG. 9, whether or not the probability variation flag is set. Is determined (S403).

  If it is determined that the probability variation flag is not set, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is set, the probability variation flag is reset (S404). Then, the time change notification flag after probability change is set (S405), and the process returns. Here, the short-time notification after the probability change is to notify that the time-short state in the time-short control mode starts when the probability-change control mode ends and the time-short control mode starts. The post-probability short-time notification flag is a flag indicating that a condition for performing short-time notification after probability change is satisfied.

  Next, the first notice effect determination process by S632 in FIG. 44 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart for explaining the first notice effect determination process. In the first notice effect determination process, the first notice effect determination process is performed according to the probability set by the low probability table or the high probability table of FIG. 11 determined based on the received second prior determination result command and the gaming state jackpot probability. The content of the first notice effect, which is the effect of the continuous notice performed at the decoration variation display unit 8k, is determined.

  First, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S501). Specifically, determination is made based on whether or not the probability variation flag set in S402 in the probability variation end determination process of FIG. 45 is set when the probability variation state is set. If not, the low-probability table RS1 shown in FIG. 11A is looked up when determining the content of the notice effect (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the received second preliminary determination result command is a second deviation preliminary determination command (S503). When it is determined that the command is the second deviation advance determination command, the corresponding notice effect flag (first notice effect flag) is set based on the distribution probability of RS1-1 and the number of consecutive notices is stored (S504). When it is determined in S503 that the command is not the second pre-determination command, and after S504, it is determined whether or not the received second pre-determination result command is the second reach pre-determination command (S505). When it is determined that the command is the second reach pre-determination command, the corresponding notice effect flag (first notice effect flag) is set based on the distribution probability of RS1-2 and the number of consecutive notices is stored (S506).

  When it is determined in S505 that the command is not the second reach pre-determination command, and after S506, it is determined whether or not the received second pre-determination result command is the second non-probable change big hit pre-determination command (S507). . If it is determined that the command is the second non-probable big hit prior determination command, the corresponding notice effect flag (first notice effect flag) is set based on the distribution probability of RS1-3 and the number of consecutive notices is stored (S508). When it is determined in S507 that the command is not the second non-probable variation jackpot advance determination command, and after S508, it is determined whether or not the second received determination result command is the second probability variation jackpot advance determination command (S509). . When it is determined that the command is the second probable big hit prior determination command, the corresponding notice effect flag (first notice effect flag) is set based on the distribution probability of RS1-4 and the number of consecutive notices is stored (S510), and the return is performed. To do.

  In S501 described above, when the probability change is in progress, the high-probability table RS2 shown in FIG. 11B is looked up when determining the content of the notice effect (S511). Then, it is determined whether or not the received second prior determination result command is a second reach prior determination command (S512). When it is determined that the command is the second reach pre-determination command, the corresponding notice effect flag (first notice effect flag) is set based on the distribution probability of RS2-2 and the number of consecutive notices is stored (S513). Next, when it is determined in S512 that the command is not the second reach pre-determination command, and after S513, it is determined whether or not the received second pre-determination result command is the second probability variation big hit pre-determination command ( S514). If it is determined that the command is the second probable big hit prior determination command, in S515, the corresponding notice effect flag (first notice effect flag) is set based on the distribution probability of RS2-4 and the number of consecutive notices is stored, and the process returns. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the command is a second probability variation big hit prior determination command, the process directly returns. In S504, S506, S508, S510, S513, and S515 described above, when it is determined to perform the notice effect based on the low probability table RS1 or the high probability table RS2, the notice effect is not performed. There is a time when is decided. For this reason, when it is determined that the notice effect is to be performed, the notice effect flag and the number of continuous notices are stored as described above, and the notice effect is executed, but when it is determined that the notice effect is not to be performed, The notice effect flag and the number of continuous notices as described above are not stored, and the notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the second notice effect determination process (S633), the notice effect performed by the second decoration variation display unit 9k based on the second prior determination command is performed by performing the same process as the first notice effect determination process. Processing related to production is performed. Here, the content of the second notice effect determination process is different from the prior determination command used to determine the notice effect and the decoration change display unit for executing the notice effect. Therefore, the duplicated description will not be repeated.

  Next, the first effect control process according to S611 in FIG. 40 and the second effect control process according to S612 in FIG. 40 will be described. The processing contents of the first effect control process and the second effect control process are as follows: the first effect control process is performed on the first decoration change display unit 8k, and the second effect control process is the second effect change. Although different in that the processing is performed on the display unit 9k, the processing contents for controlling the variable display unit to be processed are the same. For this reason, here, the first effect control process will be described as a representative example of these effects control process, and the description of the process details of the second effect control process will not be repeated. In addition, the processing content of the 1st effect control process demonstrated below is processing object called the 1st decoration fluctuation display part 8k and its related apparatus in the 1st effect control process process in the 2nd decoration fluctuation display part 9k and it. The second effect control process is performed by replacing the data such as various flags used in the first effect control process with the data of various flags used in the second effect control process. It becomes processing contents.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first effect control process according to S611 of FIG. In the first effect control process, one of S901 to S908 is executed according to the value of the first effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  First variation pattern command reception waiting process (S901): It is confirmed whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received, and when it is confirmed that the first variation pattern command has been received, the value of the first effect control process flag Is updated to a value according to S904. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the first variation pattern command has been received, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S903 in accordance with the establishment of the condition for executing the game information display process. In addition, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S902 in accordance with the establishment of the condition for executing the demonstration display. The contents of the first variation pattern command reception waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First demonstration display process (S902): Execution of demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as first demonstration display) executed by the first decoration variation display portion 8k, and establishment of conditions for ending the first demonstration display (variation pattern command) Or the like) is updated to a value corresponding to S904.

  First game information display process (S903): In the first decoration variation display unit 8k, a player menu screen is displayed, game history information and the like are displayed according to the operation, and the first effect is displayed according to the end operation. The value of the control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S901. Further, in response to receiving the variation pattern command, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S904. The contents of the first game information display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First symbol variation start processing (S904): A variation pattern to be actually used for variation display on the first ornament variation display portion 8k is determined from a plurality of variation patterns of ornament symbols determined according to the first variation pattern command. To do. Also. The variation of the decorative pattern (left middle right pattern) in the first decorative variation display portion 8k is started. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S905.

  First symbol variation processing (S905): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed, etc.) constituting the variation pattern of the ornament symbol in the first ornament variation display unit 8k, and monitors the end of the variation time. . Further, stop control of the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S906.

  First symbol stop waiting process (S906): The first effect control command (first symbol stop command) for instructing the stop of all symbols of the decorative symbols has been received after the variation time specified by the first variation pattern command has elapsed. Then, the control of displaying the stopped symbol is performed by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol on the first ornament variation display unit 8k. Thereafter, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the first decorative variation display unit 8k is a combination of the jackpot symbol, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S907, and the first decorative variation display unit is updated. When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at 8k is a combination of symbols that are out of sync, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S901.

  First big hit display processing (S907): After the decorative symbol change time at the first decorative fluctuation display portion 8k is over, the control of the probability variation big hit display or the non-probability variable big hit display is performed. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S908.

  First big hit game processing (step S908): Control is performed during the first big hit game after the display result derivation display of the big hit symbol combination on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. For example, the first special prize winning opening display indicating that the first special variable prize winning device 20 is driven by the solenoid 72 to open the first big prize winning opening 21 or the first grand prize winning opening 21 is being opened. When an effect control command for displaying the first big winning opening shown is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S901.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern command reception waiting process in S901 of FIG. In the first variation pattern command reception waiting process, it is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command reception flag is set (S341). When it is determined that the first variation pattern command reception flag is set, the first variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S342). Next, the value of the first no-change time counter is cleared (initialized) to “0” (S343). Here, the first non-varying time counter is a time measuring means for counting the time during which the decorative pattern fluctuation display is not performed in the first decorative fluctuation display portion 8k, that is, the first non-varying time. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first symbol variation start process (S904) (S344).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S341 that the first fluctuation pattern command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the first demonstration display command reception flag is set (S345). When it is determined that the first demonstration display command reception flag is not set, whether or not the value of the first no-change time counter described above is a predetermined set value (a value corresponding to 20 seconds). Is determined (S346). When it is determined that the value of the first non-variable time counter is not the set value, the value of the first non-variable time counter is added and updated by “1” (S347), and the process returns. Thus, while the value of the first non-variable time counter is not the set value, the value of the first non-variable time counter is added and updated each time the first change pattern command reception waiting process is executed. As described above, the first no-change time counter is cleared in response to receiving the first change pattern command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first no-change time counter is the set value, an image of the effective button 453 as shown in FIG. 37A is displayed on the first decoration change display portion 8k. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S348).

  When it is determined that the image of the valid button 453 is not being displayed, the second effect control process flag is used to determine whether or not game information such as game history information is displayed on the second decoration variation display unit 9k. It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the second game information display process (corresponding to S904) (S349). When the value of the second effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the second game information display process, at least the valid button 453 is operated in the second decoration variation display portion 9k, and the player menu screen is displayed. Therefore, it is determined that game information such as game history information is displayed on the second decoration variation display portion 9k.

  If it is determined in S349 that the value corresponds to the second game information display process, the process returns. Accordingly, in order to prevent the game information from being displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, game information such as game history information is first displayed on the second decoration variation display unit 9k. Is displayed, game information such as game history information is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k even when the variation display is not performed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds). It is not possible to do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S349 that the value does not correspond to the second game information display process, the image of the valid button 453 is displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k (S350), and the first display unit valid flag is displayed. Is set (S351). Here, the first display portion valid flag indicates that it is effective to display game information such as game history information in the first decoration variation display portion 8k, that is, the valid button 453 is displayed. It is a flag which shows.

When it is determined in S348 that the image of the valid button 453 is being displayed, and
When the first display unit valid flag is set in S351, the image of the valid button 453 is displayed at that time, and it is determined whether or not the enter key 191 is operated in such a state (S352). If it is determined that the enter key 191 is not operated, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter key 191 has been operated, the first display section valid flag is reset (S353). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first technique information display process of S903 (S354), and the process returns. Thereby, in the next 1st production control process processing, it shifts to the 1st game information display processing. As described above, when the first no-change time reaches the predetermined time, that is, when no change display is performed for a predetermined time in the first decoration change display section 8k, the game history information is displayed in the second decoration change display section 9k. On the condition that the game information such as the game information is not displayed, the valid button 453 is displayed and the operation key 190 is activated and the game information such as the game history information is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. It becomes possible.

  If it is determined in S345 that the first demonstration display command reception flag is set, the first demonstration display command reception flag is reset (S352), and the value of the first effect control process flag is S902. The value is updated according to the first demonstration display process (S353), and the process returns. Thereby, in the next 1st presentation control process, it transfers to the 1st demonstration display process. The first demonstration display command is used when the first decorative variation display unit 8k does not execute variation display for a time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 60 seconds) when the first non-variable time becomes the set value. It is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99. For this reason, in the 1st decoration fluctuation display part 8k, the above-mentioned player menu screen will be displayed before a 1st demonstration display.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern command reception waiting process in the second effect control process. This second variation pattern command reception waiting process is a process corresponding to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process of the second effect control process described above in the second effect control process.

  In the second variation pattern command reception waiting process, it is determined whether or not the second variation pattern command reception flag is set (S341a). When it is determined that the second variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S342a). Next, the value of the second non-variable time counter is cleared (initialized) to “0” (S343a). Here, the second non-varying time counter is a time measuring means for counting the time during which the decorative pattern fluctuation display is not performed in the second decorative fluctuation display unit 9k, that is, the second non-varying time. Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second symbol variation start process (corresponding to S904) (S344a).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S341 that the second variation pattern command reception flag is set, it is determined whether or not the second demonstration display command reception flag is set (S345a). When it is determined that the second demonstration display command reception flag is not set, whether or not the value of the second non-variable time counter described above is a predetermined set value (a value corresponding to 20 seconds). Is determined (S346a). When it is determined that the value of the second non-variable time counter is not the set value, the value of the second non-variable time counter is updated by adding “1” (S347a), and the process returns. Thus, while the value of the second non-variable time counter is not the set value, the value of the second non-variable time counter is added and updated each time the second variation pattern command reception waiting process is executed. As described above, the second no-change time counter is cleared in response to receiving the second change pattern command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second no-change time counter is the set value, the image of the effective button 453 as shown in FIG. 37A is displayed on the second decoration change display portion 9k. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S348a).

  When it is determined that the image of the valid button 453 is not being displayed, the first effect control process flag is used to determine whether or not game information such as game history information is displayed on the second decoration variation display unit 9k. It is determined whether or not the value is a value corresponding to the first game information display process (S904) (S349a). When the value of the second effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the first game information display process, at least the valid button 453 is operated on the first decoration variation display portion 8k, and the player menu screen is displayed. Therefore, it is determined that game information such as game history information is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k.

  If it is determined in S349a that the value corresponds to the first game information display process, the process returns. Thereby, in order to prevent the game information from being displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, game information such as game history information is first displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k. Is displayed, game information such as game history information is displayed on the second decoration variation display section 9k even when the second decoration variation display section 9k has not performed variation display for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds). It is not possible to do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S349a that the value does not correspond to the first game information display process, it is determined whether or not the above-described first display portion valid flag is set (S349b). When it is determined in S349b that the first display unit valid flag is set, the process returns. Thus, in order to prevent the game information from being displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, the valid button 453 is displayed first on the first decoration variation display unit 8k. When there is no change display on the second decoration change display section 9k for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds), it is possible to display game information such as game history information on the second decoration change display section 9k. Not. That is, when both the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the second ornament variation display portion 9k are in a state where the ornament symbol variation display has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds), the first ornament variation display portion. It is given priority to display game information such as game history information in the 8k direction.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S349b that the first display unit valid flag is not set, the image of the valid button 453 is displayed on the second decoration variation display unit 8k (S350a), and the process proceeds to S352a described later.

  If it is determined in S348a that the image of the valid button 453 is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the above-described first display unit valid flag is set (S350b). When it is determined in S350b that the first display section valid flag is set, the image of the valid button 453 already displayed in the second decoration variation display section 9k is deleted (S350c), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S350b that the first display unit valid flag is not set, the process proceeds to S352a. Thus, in order to prevent the game information from being displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, the valid button 453 is displayed first on the second decoration variation display unit 9k. When the valid button 453 is displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k later, priority is given to the display of the valid button 453 on the valid button 453 on the first decoration variation display unit 8k, and the second decoration variation display unit The valid button 453 displayed at 9k is immediately deleted. As a result, when the decorative pattern variation display is not performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) in both the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, the first decoration variation display unit 8k It is given priority to display game information such as game history information.

  When S352a is executed, the image of the valid button 453 is displayed, and it is determined whether or not the enter key 191 has been operated in such a state (S352a). If it is determined that the enter key 191 is not operated, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter key 191 has been operated, the second display portion valid flag is reset (S353). Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second game information display process (corresponding to S903) (S354a), and the process returns. Thereby, in the next 2nd production control process, it shifts to the 2nd game information display processing. As described above, when the second no-change time reaches the predetermined time, that is, when the change display is not performed for the predetermined time in the second decoration change display section 9k, the valid button 453 is displayed on the second decoration change display section 9k. On the condition that the game information such as the game history information is not displayed, the valid button 453 is displayed and the operation key 190 is activated in the second decoration variation display portion 9k, and the game information such as the game history information is displayed. It is possible to display.

  When it is determined in S345a that the second demonstration display command reception flag is set, the second demonstration display command reception flag is reset (S352a), and the value of the second effect control process flag is set to the second value. The value is updated according to the demonstration display process (corresponding to S902) (S353), and the process returns. Thereby, in the next second effect control process, the process proceeds to the second demonstration display process. The second demonstration display command is used when the second decorative variation display unit 9k does not execute variation display for a time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 20 seconds) when the second non-variable time becomes the set value. Sent. For this reason, in the 2nd decoration fluctuation display part 9k, the above-mentioned player menu screen will be displayed prior to a 2nd demonstration display.

  Next, the first game information display process in S903 of FIG. 47 and the second game information display process, which is a process corresponding to the first game information display process in the second effect control process, will be described. The processing contents of the first game information display process and the second game information display process are as follows. Although different in that processing is performed on the display unit 9k, the processing content for displaying game information is the same. For this reason, here, the first game information display process will be described as a representative example of these processes, and a duplicate description of the process contents of the second game information display process will not be repeated. The processing content of the first game information display process described below includes data such as various flags used in the first effect control process, with the display control target replaced with the second decoration variation display unit 9k. By replacing with data such as various flags used in the 2 effect control process, the contents of the second game information display process are obtained.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the first game information display process. In the first game information display process, it is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command reception flag is set (S361). When it is determined that the first variation pattern command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the first game information display mode flag is set (S362). Here, the first game information display mode flag is a state after the first game information display processing is selected in the first effect control process and the player menu screen is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k. It is a flag indicating that

  When it is determined that the game information display mode flag is not set, a player menu screen as shown in FIG. 37B is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k (S364), and the first The game information display mode flag is set (S365), and the process returns. Thereby, the operation of the operation button on the player menu screen by the operation of the operation key-190 is validated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first game information display mode flag is set, it is determined whether or not the operation button has been operated on the player menu screen (S363). Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not various operation buttons shown in FIGS.

  If it is determined that the operation button is not operated on the player menu screen, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button is operated on the player menu screen, data processing and image display corresponding to the operation button operation are executed (S366). That is, in accordance with the operation of the operation button, data processing such as data setting necessary for displaying an image is executed, and various images as described with reference to FIGS. It is displayed on the fluctuation display part 8k.

  Next, in the operation button operation determined in S366, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of the return button 459 on the player menu screen, that is, an end operation of the player menu screen (S367). When it is determined that there is no end operation, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end operation has been performed, the first game information display mode flag is reset (S368). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process (S369).

  If it is determined in S361 that the first variation pattern command reception flag is set, the first variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S370), and the first game information display mode flag is reset. (S371). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first symbol variation start process (S372), and the process returns. Thus, when the first variation pattern command is received in a state where information such as game history information is displayed based on an operation after the player menu screen is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k, The first decorative variation display portion 8k starts the decorative symbol variation display.

  Next, the first symbol variation start process in S904 of FIG. 47 and the second symbol variation start process that is a process corresponding to the first symbol variation start process in the second effect control process will be described. The first symbol variation start process and the second symbol variation start process are performed by the first symbol variation start process for the first ornament variation display unit 8k, and the second symbol variation start process is the second ornament variation. Although different in that processing is performed on the display unit 9k, the processing content for controlling is the same. For this reason, here, the first symbol variation start process will be described as a representative example of these processes, and the description of the process details of the second symbol variation start process will not be repeated. In addition, the processing content of the 1st symbol variation start process demonstrated below replaces the object which performs control with the 2nd decoration variation display part 9k, and 2nd data, such as various flags used by 1st effect control process processing, are 2nd. By replacing with data such as various flags used in the effect control process, the contents of the second symbol variation start process are obtained.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the first symbol variation start process (S904) of FIG. First, a variable display pattern corresponding to the received command is set (S830). Specifically, in S830, the data used for the variable display is set, so that the variable display pattern is set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the aforementioned post-probability short time notification flag is set (S831). When it is determined that the post-probability short-time notification flag is set, data for displaying an image of the post-probability time-short notification background is set in the data used for variable display (S832). Time change notification after probability change is performed by displaying a background image for notification of time reduction after probability change as a background image. In the present embodiment, for example, by displaying a background image of a predetermined color (for example, red) that is not displayed in a state other than the state in which the time change notification after the probability change is performed, the time change notification after the probability change is performed. The background image for the time change notification after the probability change may be any image as long as the player can recognize that the time change notification after the probability change is performed. Then, the post-probability short time notification flag that has been set is reset (S832a), and the process proceeds to S833.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S831 that the post-probability short time notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to S833 as it is. In S833, it is determined whether the first notice effect flag is set. This first notice effect flag is set in the first notice effect determination process of FIG. When it is determined that the first notice effect flag is set, the first notice effect start time timer is started (S834), and data for effect such as display of the character and the background according to the first notice effect flag. Is set to data used for variable display (S835).

  When it is determined in S833 that the first notice effect flag is not set, and after S835, a first variation time timer for counting the variation display time of the first decoration variation display unit 8k is started (S836). ). Next, the first decorative symbol display for derivation and display of the display result in the first decorative variable display unit 8k is started with the set variable display pattern and variable display time (S837). Then, the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first symbol variation processing (S902) (S838), and the process returns.

  Next, the first symbol variation processing in S905 of FIG. 47 and the second symbol variation processing that is processing corresponding to the first symbol variation processing in the second effect control process will be described. The processing contents of the first symbol variation processing and the second symbol variation processing are the first symbol variation processing performed on the first ornament variation display unit 8k, and the second symbol variation processing is the second ornament variation. Although different in that the processing is performed on the display unit 9k, the processing content for controlling is the same. Therefore, here, the first symbol variation processing is described as a representative example of these processing, and the description of the processing details of the second symbol variation processing is not repeated. Note that the processing contents of the first symbol variation processing described below are the data of various flags and the like used in the first effect control process processing while the display control target is replaced with the second decoration variation display section 9k. By substituting with data such as various flags used in the 2 effect control process, the processing contents of the second symbol variation process are obtained.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the first symbol variation processing (S905) of FIG. In the first symbol variation processing, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs the following processing.

  First, an additional effect process for performing an additional effect in accordance with the normal variation display is performed (S819). Here, the additional effect refers to an effect performed in a mode added to a normal effect, such as the aforementioned notice effect. The contents of the additional effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (S820). If the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the first interruption command is received (S824). Here, the interruption command is a flag indicating that the decorative symbol variation display is suspended in accordance with the suspension of the special symbol variation display described above. The interruption command includes a first interruption command indicating interruption of fluctuation display in the first decoration fluctuation display section 8k and a second interruption command indicating interruption of fluctuation display in the second decoration fluctuation display section 9k.

  If the first interruption command is received in S824, the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (S825), and the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c is apparently interrupted in the first decoration fluctuation display portion 8k. In addition to the display, a variable interruption display for displaying a variable message 100 indicating that the control of the variable display is actually continued is performed (S826). In this variation interruption display, the variation display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c is apparently interrupted by temporarily suspending the variation display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c by the combination of the symbols. The first decorative design that is temporarily stopped in this way may be a predetermined symbol combination or may be a randomly determined symbol combination. Such a variation interruption display is also a display that means that the subtraction of the decorative symbol process timer for measuring the variation time in the variation display section on which the variation interruption display is performed is suspended.

  If the first fluctuation interruption flag is set in S820, it is confirmed whether or not the first restart command is received (S821). If the first restart command is received in S821, the first variation interruption flag is reset (S822), and the first ornament variation display unit 8k is indicated to resume the variation display of the first ornament symbols 8a to 8c. The change restart display is performed (S823). If the first restart command is not received in S821, the first symbol variation process is terminated and the process returns.

  When the first interruption command is not received in S824 and after S823, it is confirmed whether or not the process timer has timed out (S827), and if it has timed out, the effect control execution data is switched (S828). . In this embodiment, process data indicating the variation pattern of the decorative design is provided (stored) for each variation pattern. The process data is composed of data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timers and presentation control execution data. The effect control CPU 118 selects the process data according to the change pattern command and changes the decorative pattern in the change mode set in the effect control execution data for the time set in the process timer with reference to the process data. Control to display.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the first variation time timer has timed out (S829a). If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the process returns. On the other hand, if the first variation time timer has timed out, the monitoring timer is started (S829b), the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first symbol stop waiting process (S906) (S829c), Return.

  With the above processing, when the big hit symbol combination is derived and displayed on the second ornament fluctuation display portion 9k and the big hit gaming state is set, the first fluctuation interruption flag is set based on the reception of the first interruption command. In the first decoration fluctuation display section 8k, fluctuation interruption display is performed. Then, control is performed so that the processing after S827 is not executed until the first restart command is received. That is, control is performed so that the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c are not displayed in a variable manner.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on one of the fluctuation display portions, the interruption command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 to the effect control board 90 and the interruption command is received. On the basis of this, the production control microcomputer 118 is controlled to interrupt the fluctuation display in the other fluctuation display section. Further, when the above-described big hit gaming state is completed in a state where control for interrupting such variable display is performed, a restart command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 to the effect control board 90, and the restart command is executed. Based on the reception, the production control microcomputer 118 performs control to resume the interrupted variation display.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart for explaining the additional effect process in S819 of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not the first notice effect start time timer has timed out (S814). That is, it is determined whether it is time to start the notice effect.

  When the first notice effect start time timer has not timed out, the process returns. On the other hand, when the first notice effect start time timer times out, display of a character and a background image (see FIG. 61) for performing the first notice effect (continuous notice) is started (S815). Then, 1 is subtracted from the number of continuous notices stored together with the first notice effect flag set as described above (S816). Next, it is determined whether or not the subtracted continuous notice number is “0” (S817). If it is “0”, the first notice effect flag set as described above is reset. To return. More specifically, for example, when the execution condition is established when the hold memory is “2” and the first notice effect flag / continuous storage number “3” is set in the hold memory “3” is set. The notice effect is continuously executed three times in the variable display of the hold memory “1”, the hold memory “2”, and the hold memory “3”. In addition, since the number of consecutive notices corresponding to the first notice effect flag after starting the third notice effect is 3-3 = “0”, the first notice effect flag is reset (S818), and the process returns. Thereby, the continuous notice effect in the 1st decoration fluctuation display part 8k is complete | finished.

  By performing the additional effect process as described above, the notice is notified in the variable display for the number of consecutive notices determined as described above.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the game data collection process in S614 of FIG. In the game data collection process, it is determined whether or not a game data collection signal has been input (S381). Here, the signal for collecting game data refers to a signal indicating game data to be collected in order to create history data as described above. Specifically, the game data collection signals include a variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 99, a stop symbol command, first to third payout number commands, and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194. It is. The variation pattern command is used for creating history data for displaying each of the above-described jackpot information, jackpot probability, and start winning ratio. The stop symbol command is used for creating history data for displaying the big hit ratio. The first to third payout number commands and the detection signal of the launch ball sensor 194 are used for creating history data for displaying the slump graph described above.

  If it is determined that no game data collection signal has been input, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that a game data collection signal has been input, processing for creating and updating history data based on the game data such as the input signal is performed (S382). Specifically, history data is created and the history data is updated as follows.

  When a variation pattern command is input, it is determined whether the command is a command indicating that it is a big hit. When the input fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating that it is out of place, the data of the number of fluctuation display times used for displaying the big hit information is updated and the big hit probability in the display of the big hit probability is displayed. The data of the number of fluctuation display times used for calculation of the actual measurement value is updated.

  In addition, when the input variation pattern command is a command indicating that it is a big hit, data indicating the combination of the big hit symbols of the decorative symbols determined in S624 of the command analysis process described above is read from the RAM. Then, the combination of the big hit symbol is displayed as a big hit symbol, and the history data for displaying the big hit symbol information that displays the data of the fluctuation display number of the outliers updated as described above as the big hit variation display number is created. Is done. Furthermore, when the input variation pattern command is a command indicating that it is a big hit, the data of the number of fluctuation display times that is a big hit used to calculate the actual value of the big hit probability in the display of the big hit probability is updated. Then, based on the data and the data of the fluctuation display frequency that is used for calculating the actual value with the jackpot probability updated as described above, the actual value (cumulative value) of the jackpot probability is calculated. Then, history data for displaying the calculated value as an actual measurement value of the jackpot probability is created.

  In addition, in the production control microcomputer 118, in order to obtain the above-described start winning ratio, the first start winning number counter that counts the number of received first variation pattern commands and the received second variation pattern command. A second start winning number counter that counts the number is provided. Each time the variation pattern command is received, the first start winning number counter or the second start winning number counter depends on whether the variation pattern command is the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command. The addition is updated. Data indicating the ratio between the number of starting prizes displayed by variably displaying the first variation display section and the number of starting prizes variably displayed by the second variation display section by performing an operation for obtaining the ratio of the count values of these counters. Is obtained, and history data for displaying the ratio is created.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 118 counts the number of first big hits which counts the number of probability variable big hit symbol commands and non-probable big hit symbol commands among the received first stop symbol commands in order to obtain the above-mentioned big hit ratio. A counter and a second big hit number counter that counts the number of probable big hit symbol commands and non-probable big hit symbol commands among the received second stop symbol commands are provided. Each time a first stop symbol command or a second stop symbol command indicating either a probabilistic big hit symbol command or a non-probable big hit symbol command is received, the first big hit number counter or the second big hit number counter is added and updated. It will be done. Then, by calculating the ratio of the count values of these counters, the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display on the first fluctuation display section and the big hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display on the second fluctuation display section Data indicating the ratio to the number of occurrences is obtained, and history data for displaying the ratio is created.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 is provided with a difference ball number counter for counting the number of difference balls displayed in the slump graph described above. Specifically, when the first to third payout number commands are input, the prize ball payout number indicated by the input command is added to the value of the difference ball number counter. When a detection signal from the firing ball sensor 194 is input, the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted every time the detection signal is input. Thereby, the difference ball number counter is updated every time a prize ball is paid out and every time a hit ball is fired. Each time the difference ball counter is updated in this way, history data (data relating the difference ball number and the elapsed time from the start of counting the difference ball number) for displaying the difference ball number in the slump graph is obtained. Created. In addition, every time a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194 is input, a count value is added and updated to provide a hit ball counter that counts the number of hit balls into the game area 7 to indicate that it is a big hit. Each time a variation pattern command is input, the count value of the hitting ball number counter at that time is set to the number of hitting balls between the big hits (necessary for driving into the game area 7 until it is controlled to one big hit gaming state) (The number of game balls played) may be created as history data (the count value of the pitched ball counter is reset each time a variation pattern command indicating that it is a big hit is input). In that case, the data on the number of hitting balls between the big hits is displayed as the big hit information together with the big hit information table 460 or separately from the big hit information table 460.

  Next, the history data created and updated in S382 is stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 118 (S383). Then return.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, an example in which a suspend command and a resume command are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a suspend command and a resume command are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99. Alternatively, the instruction control microcomputer 118 may be instructed to stop the decorative symbol variation display. Such a configuration will be described below as a second embodiment.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process according to the second embodiment. In the first special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process. It is determined whether or not the second big hit execution flag is set (step SA (hereinafter simply referred to as SA) 81). When the second big hit execution flag is set, the same special symbol variation display (S85a) as S88a of FIG. 28 is performed (first special symbol variation interruption process) (SA85), and return To do.

  On the other hand, when the second big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol variation interruption process by SA85 is being executed (SA81a). When it is determined in SA81a that it is being executed, the same processing for resuming the variable display of the second special symbol as in S106a of FIG. 30 is performed (SA81b). Further, when it is determined in SA81a that it is not being executed and after SA81b, the first special symbol process timer is decremented by 1 (SA82), and it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has timed out (SA83). . If the special symbol process timer has timed out, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (S304) (SA84).

  When it is determined in SA81 that the second big hit execution flag is set, the first special symbol variation process is terminated without executing the process, and the process returns. When the first special symbol process is executed again, the first special symbol variation process is executed, but the special symbol process timer is not subtracted. As described above, in the first embodiment, the process of setting the interrupt flag and transmitting the interrupt command to the effect control microcomputer 118 is executed, but in the second embodiment, these processes are not executed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process according to the second embodiment. The game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process in the first special symbol stop process. First, the process for stopping the change display of the first special symbol similar to S90 of FIG. 29 is performed (SA90). Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the first special symbol stop command is set in the pointer (SA91), and it is confirmed whether or not the first big hit flag is set (SA92). If the first big hit flag is set in SA92, the first big hit flag is reset (SA93), and the first big hit execution flag is set (SA93a). Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the first jackpot start command is set in the pointer (SA93b).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the first test signal creation flag is set (SA94). When it is set, the first test signal is created and set to a predetermined output port (the first test signal creation flag is also reset) (SA95), and the process proceeds to SA96. Proceed directly to SA96. In SA96, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening release pre-processing (S205).

  If the first big hit flag is not set in SA92, it is determined whether the second test signal creation flag is set (SA97). When it is set, the second test signal is generated and set to a predetermined output port (the second test signal generation flag is also reset) (SA98), and the process proceeds to SA99, while when it is not set, Proceed directly to SA99. In SA99, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S200).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first big hit ending process according to the second embodiment. The game control microcomputer 99 performs the following process in the first jackpot end process. First, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (SA101). The probability variation flag is set when it is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (see S201) in the first special symbol process processing according to the second embodiment that the stopped symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol. If the probability change flag is set in SA101, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the probability change jackpot end command is set in the pointer (SA102). If the probability variation flag is not set in SA101, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the non-probability variation big hit end command is set in the pointer (SA103).

  Next, after the first big hit execution flag is reset (SA104), the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S200) (SA106). As described above, in the first embodiment, the process of transmitting the restart command for instructing the restart of the variable display to the effect control board 90 is executed. However, in the second embodiment, the restart command is not transmitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the first symbol variation processing according to the second embodiment. The effect control microcomputer 118 performs the following processing in the first symbol variation processing. First, the additional effect process described with reference to FIG. 53 is performed (SA819). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (SA820). If the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the second big hit start command is received (SA824). If the second big hit start command is received at SA824, the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (SA825), and the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c is apparently interrupted at the first decoration fluctuation display portion 8k. In addition, a variable interruption display for displaying the changing message 100 indicating that the variable display is actually continued is performed (SA826). In this variation interruption display, the variation display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c is temporarily stopped by the combination of the symbols.

  If the first variation interruption flag is set in SA820, it is confirmed whether or not the second probability variable big hit end command or the second non-probable big hit end command has been received (SA821). If the second probability variation jackpot end command or the second non-probability variation jackpot termination command is received in SA821, the first variation interruption flag is reset (SA822), and the first ornament variation display portion 8k is displayed with the first ornament symbols 8a to 8a. The change restart display indicating that the change display of 8c is resumed is performed (SA823). If the second probability variation jackpot end command or the second non-probability variation jackpot termination command is not received in SA821, the first symbol variation processing is terminated and the process returns.

  If the second big hit start command is not received in SA824, it is confirmed whether or not the process timer has timed out (SA827), and if it has timed out, the effect control execution data is switched (SA828). If the first variation time timer has timed out (SA829a), the monitoring timer is started (SA829b), and the first process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first symbol stop waiting process (S903) (SA829c). .

  As described above, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second decoration fluctuation display portion 9k and the big hit gaming state is entered, the fluctuation interruption flag is set and the fluctuation interruption display is performed based on the reception of the second big hit start command. To do. Then, control is performed so that the processing after SA827 is not executed until the second probability variation jackpot end command or the second non-probability variation jackpot end command is received. That is, control is performed so that the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c are not displayed in a variable manner.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. In the second embodiment, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on one of the variable display portions and the big hit gaming state is entered, the second big hit from the main board 120 is achieved. Based on the fact that the start command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 and the second jackpot start command is received, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs control to interrupt the variable display. Also, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the second probability variable big hit end command or the second non-probable variable big hit end command is transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90, and the second probability variable big hit end command or the second non-probable big hit end is completed. Based on the reception of the command, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs control to resume the variable display.

[Common explanations of the first and second embodiments]
Next, common explanation items of the first and second embodiments will be described. A display mode of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k when the control of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is performed will be described. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect display of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k. In this embodiment, there are provided two fluctuation display parts, a first decoration fluctuation display part 8k and a second decoration fluctuation display part 9k, and each of the fluctuation display parts performs a special symbol fluctuation display in parallel. Yes. That is, in FIG. 59 (A), when the variation display of the first decoration symbols 8a to 8c is executed in the first ornament variation display portion 8k, the second ornament variation display portion 9k also displays the second decoration symbols 9a to 9c. Are displayed in parallel.

  From the main board 120, the first fluctuation pattern command for instructing the production control board 90 to change the first decoration symbols 8a to 8c in the first decoration fluctuation display section 8k, and the second in the second decoration fluctuation display section 9k. A second variation pattern command that indicates the variation mode of the decorative symbols 9a to 9c is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 118 performs control so that the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed in the variation display unit according to the received variation pattern command.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The command for instructing the variation pattern of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c in the first ornament variation display portion 8k and the command for instructing the variation pattern of the second ornament symbols 9a to 9c in the second ornament variation display portion 9k are MODE. Alternatively, by making EXT different, it is possible to specify which variation display command the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 120 is the variation pattern of the special symbol in which variation display unit. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), while the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8a to 8c is being executed in the first decorative variable display portion 8k, that is, S82 in the first special symbol variable processing shown in FIG. When the first special symbol process timer has not timed out, the big special symbol (specific display result) is derived by the second special symbol variation process (or the second special symbol stop process) in the second special symbol process (S25). Based on the display, the second big hit execution flag is set, and the second special symbol stop process is performed to send a second big hit start command to the effect control board 90. In the second embodiment described above, the production control microcomputer 118 sets the variable interruption flag at SA825 when receiving the second big hit start command at SA824, and performs the variable interruption display at SA826.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the first special symbol variation process (S203) is executed, it is determined in S87 that the second big hit execution flag is set, and the interruption flag is set in S88. At the same time, a process for transmitting an interruption command to the effect control board 90 is performed in S89. The effect control microcomputer 118 sets a variable interruption flag in S825 when an interruption command is received in S824, and performs a variable interruption display in S826.

  As shown in FIG. 59C, when the interruption command is received in the first embodiment or the second big hit start command is received in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the first decoration variation display. The changing message 100 is displayed on the part 8k, and the off symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the non-specific display result is stopped and displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k that interrupts the variation display. By stopping and displaying the non-specific display result at the variation display unit that interrupts the variation display, it is possible to suspend the variation display of the decorative symbols without causing distrust to the player. At this time, a combination of jackpot symbols (specific display result) is derived and displayed on the second decoration variation display portion 9k.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the changing message 100 is displayed until the big hit gaming state ends (see FIGS. 59D and 59E), the player is notified until the big hit gaming state ends. It is possible to interrupt the display of the decorative symbols without giving distrust. FIG. 59 (D) shows an example of the first round in the big hit gaming state.

  When the big hit gaming state is ended, a second big hit end command (probability variable big hit end command or non-probability variable big hit end command) is transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90. In FIG. 59 (E), in response to the reception of the probability change jackpot end command as the second jackpot end command, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the jackpot game state in the second decoration variation display section 9k and the probability change is changed. It is exemplified that a display notifying that the state has been reached is performed. In the first embodiment described above, a resume command is further transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 118 receives "restart command" as the change resume display 103 in S823 based on the receipt of the resume command. And the process after S827 is executed to resume the variable display (see FIG. 59F). In the example shown in FIG. 59, the display result finally derived after the restart of the change in the first decoration change display unit 8k is a jackpot symbol (see FIG. 59 (H)). In that case, the display state in the first decoration variation display portion 8k shown in FIG. 59 (E) may be changed to a display indicating that effect (for example, “win another time”). In that case, the effect display about the big hit game state is performed using both the first ornament fluctuation display portion 8k and the second ornament fluctuation display portion 9k (the big hit game is displayed in the second ornament fluctuation display portion 9k). Since the notification of the next big hit occurrence is made in advance in the first decoration variation display section 8k), the visual effect is enhanced and the player's interest can be improved.

  In this way, when the big win symbol is derived and displayed on the other fluctuation display section while the special symbol and decoration pattern fluctuation display on one fluctuation display section, the fluctuation display section displays the fluctuation display. The message 100 during change indicating that the game is interrupted is displayed, and the symbol is temporarily stopped and the special symbol and the decorative symbol on the one variable display unit are resumed when the big hit gaming state is ended. Since the change restart display 103 is performed, the change display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol can be interrupted without causing distrust to the player.

  FIG. 59 further shows a state in which a new decorative symbol variation is executed in the second decorative variation display portion 9k (see FIGS. 59F to 59H). That is, after the big hit game state is finished, the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started again in the second decorative change display unit 9k (FIG. 59F), and the first big hit start command (or the first implementation) is performed from the main board 120. In response to the transmission of the suspension command for the second decoration variation display portion 9k in the form, the effect control microcomputer 118 stops displaying the off-sign symbol together with the changing message 100 on the second decoration variation display portion 9k. This is shown in FIG. 59 (H).

  In FIG. 60, the decoration for the first decoration variation display section 8k is displayed based on the fact that the first special symbol process timer has timed out after the decoration display of the decoration pattern is started again in the second decoration variation display section 9k. An effect control command (symbol stop command) indicating symbol stop is transmitted from the main board 120, but a first big hit start command (or an interrupt command for the second decoration variation display portion 9k in the first embodiment) is transmitted. It is shown that the effect control microcomputer 118 derived and displayed the shifted symbol on the first decoration variation display portion 8k when there was no such event (FIG. 60 (H)). In this case, in the second decoration variation display portion 9k, the display of the variation of the decorative pattern is continued without the off symbol being stopped and displayed.

  The production control microcomputer 118 displays a visible display (for example, a change) when the first decoration change display unit 8k or the second decoration change display unit 9k stops the display with the changing message 100 and stops the display. You may stop the decorative design that has been displayed in the middle of the display) (if the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, shift any symbol in the middle left and right) The stop symbol may be determined according to the random number, or the stop symbol may be selected in a predetermined order, and the method of selecting the stop symbol is arbitrary.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing continuous notice as an example of effect display on the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k. In FIG. 61, a series of fluctuation display of (A) and (B) is executed, then a series of fluctuation display of (C) and (D) is executed, and then (E) and (F). A mode of continuous notice when a series of variable displays is executed is shown.

  The continuous notice is an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur, and is a notice that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. In this embodiment, the continuous notice is performed on any one of the change display sections. When the continuous notice is given in any one of the change display sections, it means that the big hit is generated in the other change display section. That is, when the continuous notice is given on the first decoration change display section 8k side, the occurrence of a big hit on the second decoration change display section 9k side is notified. On the contrary, when the continuous notice is given on the second decoration change display part 9k side, the occurrence of a big hit on the first decoration change display part 8k side is notified.

  For example, the notice character and background are set in S835 in FIG. 51, and the notice character and background display is started in S815 in FIG. 53 based on the setting. As shown in 61 (A), (C), and (E), a notice character 91 is displayed, and a notice background image 90 (for example, the color of the background image 90 is a predetermined color for notice). (For example, blue which is different from the red of the short time notification after probability change) is displayed. In this example, the continuous notice is performed during the execution of the variable display each time on the side of the variable display unit on which the continuous notice is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the continuous notice as shown in (A), (C), and (E) becomes the notice display for the jackpot shown in (F). Such variable display in which continuous notice is performed is executed in the variable display before the display result of the combination of jackpot symbols is derived and displayed for the number of times corresponding to the number of continuous notices set as described above. In addition, in this embodiment, the display of the variation display subject to continuous notice, for example, the display of the variation display that is performed simultaneously with the variation display of the time when the display result of the combination of the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, In the variable display performed before the display result is derived and displayed, continuous notice is performed. Note that the number of times of variable display for which continuous notice is given includes the time of change display that is the subject of continuous notice, for example, the number of times of change display that is performed at the same time as the change display of the time when the display result of the combination of jackpot symbols is derived and displayed. It may not be possible.

  In this way, when a notice in which the notice character and the background are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays is executed, the player has a sense of expectation that a big hit will occur and the interest is improved. .

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram of a special winning opening determination table. The big prize opening determination table is a specific variation display unit (for example, the first decoration variation display unit 8k) among a plurality of variation display units (the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k in the above example). ) In the big hit gaming state that is started based on the derivation and display of the big hit symbol in (2), in order to open the big winning opening according to a predetermined opening order pattern, provided that a plurality of big winning openings are not opened at the same time (Stored in the ROM 54). As shown in FIG. 62, in the big prize opening determination table, the left big prize opening (first big prize opening 21) and the right big prize opening (first big prize opening 23) in each round (1R to 15R). Is set in advance for each type of jackpot symbol. “Left” indicates that the left big prize opening is opened, and “Right” indicates that the right big prize opening is opened. For example, when the jackpot symbol is “0”, the left big winning opening and the right big winning opening are alternately opened. In addition, in the grand prize opening determination table, a circle (○) means that it is decided to notify the big prize opening to be opened before the grand prize opening is opened. is doing. For example, when the big hit symbol is “5”, since 1R, 3R, 5R, 7R, 9R, 11R, 13R, and 15R are circled, the notification is executed in the round. In the example shown in FIG. 62, the big prize opening determination table executes notification when the big hit symbol is a probability variation symbol (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”). In the case of other normal symbols, the notification is set not to be executed. In particular, when the jackpot symbol is “7”, notification is performed in all rounds.

  The game control microcomputer 99 mounted on the main board 120 is used in the jackpot gaming state at that time based on the jackpot symbol and the jackpot determination table in the first jackpot opening pre-processing (S205). The winning opening opening pattern (that is, the advantageous state pattern) to be determined is determined. In each round, the first special variable winning device 20 or the second special variable winning device 22 is in an open state in which the game ball can easily win (game) based on the big winning opening opening pattern determined to be used. The first state which is advantageous to the person). By such control, the special winning opening that the player should aim for during the specific game state is changed, and the interest of the game can be further improved. Here, the control using the big prize winning determination table is performed in the big hit gaming state started based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on a specific fluctuation display part (for example, the first decoration fluctuation display part 8k). In the big hit gaming state that starts based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the other fluctuation display portion (for example, the second decoration fluctuation display portion 9k), a predetermined big prize opening (for example, the first big win) The winning opening 23) is controlled to be in the open state, but the big winning opening opening pattern may be used for the big hits in all or not all the variable display portions. Here, the release order pattern (advantageous state pattern) is determined based on the jackpot symbol. However, another method, for example, the release order pattern may be determined based on a random number.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first and second embodiments, the end condition of the probability variation state is that the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without displaying the display result of the combination of jackpot symbols, and the predetermined number of times A case has been described in which the display result of the combination of uncertain change big hit symbols is derived and displayed before the change display (for example, 100 times) is executed. In the third embodiment, as the end condition for the probability change state, in addition to the end condition for the probability change state in the first and second embodiments, a determination to end the probability change state in the probability change end determination performed each time the variable display is performed. An example including what has been done will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining various random counters used for game control by the game control microcomputer 99 according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, in addition to random counters R1 to R8 shown in FIG. 8, a random counter R9 for determining the end of probability change for determining whether or not to end the probability change state is used. It is done. R9 is updated by adding a predetermined number every 2 msec and the remaining interrupt processing time, updated from 0 and updated to 29 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. The probability variation end determination is executed every time the variation display is performed in the probability variation state. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the value of R9 is extracted every time the variation display is performed, and when the extracted value matches a predetermined probability variation end determination value, it is determined that the probability variation state is terminated. Probability end determination is performed. Further, when it is determined that the probability variation state is to be ended, a notification that the probability variation state has ended may be performed, or such notification may not be performed. Such a notification includes a notification by a display device such as a first variation display unit and a second variation display unit, a notification by output of sound from the speaker 27, and a notification by light emission of a light emitting means such as a predetermined lamp. What is necessary is just to perform in alerting | reporting modes, such as alerting | reporting by any one or any combination.

  FIG. 64 shows a first variation display unit (first special symbol display unit 8, first decoration variation display unit 8k) and a second variation display unit (second special symbol display unit) in the probability variation state and the short time state according to the third embodiment. 9 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the second decoration variation display unit 9k). In FIG. 64, (a) to (e) each control state is shown as in FIG.

  64 differs from FIG. 12 in the following points. That is, in the case of the third embodiment, the third probability variation end condition is added to the first probability variation end condition and the second probability variation end condition described in the first embodiment as the probability variation end condition. The third probability change end condition is satisfied when it is determined to end the probability change state by the probability change end determination using R9 described above. For this reason, the second probability variation end condition that the display result of the combination of non-probability large hit symbols is derived and displayed as the probability variation end condition that is satisfied until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of fluctuation display is executed in the probability variation state. Is satisfied and when it is determined that the probability variation state is to be terminated by the probability variation end determination. Specifically, when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied, as shown at timing 4 in FIG. 64, a fluctuation display (non-probability variation) when the probability variation end determination is made in the probability variation state by the probability variation end determination. When the variation display determined to be a big hit is started, the probability variation flag is reset. Thereby, also in the case of the third embodiment, as in the case of the first and second embodiments, the probability variation flag indicates that the third probability variation end condition is satisfied when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied in the probability variation state. It can be said that it is reset at the start of the variable display that establishes. Each of the first probability variation end condition, the second probability variation end condition, the third probability variation end condition, or a combination condition thereof in the present embodiment is referred to as a first end condition.

  In the time reduction state, as in the case of the first and second embodiments, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of fluctuation display is executed after the timing 5 at which the fluctuation display for which the probability variation flag has been reset ends. A second probability variation end condition (non-probability variable big hit) that a variation display that is a non-probable big hit is executed until the first short-time end condition is established or before the first short time end condition is established ) Will continue until Note that the time-saving end condition in the present embodiment is also referred to as a second end condition.

  When the third probability change end condition is satisfied as shown in the timing 4, the time reduction flag is not reset at the start of the variation display in which the probability change end is determined to be ended by the probability change end determination in the probability change state. The stored data in the set state is maintained. As described above, the time reduction flag is set at the start of the variable display in which it is determined in the probability variation state that the probability variation state is terminated by the probability variation end determination when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied. As described above, when the probability variation state is determined by the probability variation end determination in the middle of the probability variation state defined by the number of fluctuations, that is, when the probability variation control mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is associated with the probability variation state after the certain probability variation state ends. It is controlled to the short time control mode when there is no single short time state.

  Next, a control method for realizing the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart for explaining the probability change end determination process according to the third embodiment. The probability change end determination process in FIG. 65 is a process that replaces the probability change end determination process in FIG. 25 according to the first embodiment. About FIG. 65, the same step number is attached | subjected to the part which is common in FIG. 25, and the overlapping description about the said step is not repeated.

  The processing in FIG. 65 differs from the processing in FIG. 25 in step S72a. Specifically, when it is determined in S72 that the number of fluctuations at the time of probability variation has not reached the number of times of probability variation end, the value of R9 is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the extracted value matches the above-described probability variation end determination value. (S72a). When it is determined that the extracted value of R9 and the probability variation end determination value do not match, the probability variation state is not terminated by proceeding to S73. On the other hand, when it is determined that the extracted value of R9 matches the probability variation end determination value, the process proceeds to S74, whereby the probability variation flag is reset in S75, and the probability variation state ends. As described above, in the probability variation end determination process according to the third embodiment, when the probability variation flag is not set, R9 is set each time the variation display is executed until the probability variation variation count reaches the probability variation termination count. The end of probability change is determined by the lottery used.

  Next, main effects obtained by the first to third embodiments described above will be described.

  (1) When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game state data is initialized on the game control microcomputer 99 side according to the operation of the clear switch 921 provided on the rear surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 However, the effect control microcomputer 118 side confirms that it has been determined in S604 in FIG. When such a confirmation is made, the game store menu screen for initializing the game history data stored on the production control microcomputer 118 side is displayed in S421 of FIG. 41 as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the first decoration variation display portion 8k (or the second decoration variation display portion 9k). The history data can be cleared by the operation key 190 only when the initialization data management process of FIG. 41 is executed, that is, when the game shop menu screen is displayed in S421. The stored game history data is initialized in S423 on the condition that it is determined that the initialization operation in 190 has been performed. Therefore, when the game state data on the game control microcomputer 99 side and the game history data on the effect control microcomputer 118 side are initialized together, the operation provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. The operation of the means, that is, the operation means that is complicated to operate, can be limited to operating one operation means called the clear switch 921. Further, by assigning other necessary operations to operation keys 190 as display operation means provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, operation means that can be operated easily, the game state data and the game In the configuration in which each history data is backed up and stored, the initialization operation of the data stored in the backup can be simplified. Further, since the operation key 190 is provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be operated by the player, the history data initialization operation by the operation key 190 displays a menu screen for a game store. Since it becomes effective only when the game history data is initialized, it is a precondition that the clear switch 921 provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from initializing game history data without permission.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the clear signal is not directly input from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 to the payout control microcomputer 660, but from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 via the game control microcomputer 99, The command can be input to the payout control microcomputer 660 as a control command. Thus, when the RAM initialization process is performed by the game control microcomputer 99, the payout control microcomputer 660 always performs the RAM initialization process. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the RAM initialization process is performed by only one of the game control microcomputer 99 and the payout control microcomputer 660.

  Further, when the probability variation end condition is established by the non-probability variable big hit symbol being stopped and displayed, and when the variable display for stopping and displaying the non-probability variable big hit symbol is started, S127 of FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process, By the same step in the second special symbol process, the probability variation flag is updated to the data indicating the reset state, while the time-short flag set in S125 of FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process is maintained. As a result, when switching from the probability variation state of the probability variation control mode to the state of the time variation state in the non-probability variation state in the subsequent time-shortening control mode, the switching timing becomes clear, and the period during which the gaming state is unclear It can be prevented from occurring. In addition, for the variable display to be newly started after the variable display for stopping and displaying the non-probable big hit symbol is started, S56 to S58 in FIG. 24 in the first special symbol process, and further in the second special symbol process. According to similar steps, it is possible to appropriately determine the big hit depending on whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state.

  Further, S129 in FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process, and the same step in the second special symbol process, as shown in the timing 7 in FIG. When the time reduction state in the time reduction control mode ends and the time reduction state ends, the time reduction flag is reset at the start of the variable display where the uncertain change big hit will occur. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display in the short time state from being executed excessively and to prevent the player from being unfair.

  That is, for example, when a variable display that causes an uncertain change big hit in the short-time control mode is executed on one of the variable display units, the time-short flag is reset at the end of the variable display. The number of times of variation display executed by the other variation display unit during execution of one variation display unit in which an uncertain variation big hit occurs varies depending on the skill of the player, the player's luck, and the like. For this reason, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display in the short time state is excessively performed, which may cause unfairness to the player. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, when a non-probable variable big hit occurs in the short-time control mode and the short-time state in the short-time control mode ends, the variable display that causes the non-probable big hit occurs. If the time reduction flag is reset at the start, the fluctuation display in the time reduction control mode will not be performed during the execution of one of the fluctuation display sections, which will cause an uncertain change big hit. Can be prevented from being performed excessively, and unfairness can be prevented for the player.

  (2) As shown in S346 to S351 in FIG. 48 and S361 to S366 in FIG. 50, when the variable display is not performed over a predetermined period for each of the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit, It is possible to display game history information based on game history data. For this reason, if there is no variable display for a predetermined period, the player can freely view the history information.

  (3) When the game history information is being displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k or the second decoration variation display unit 9k, the decoration design is displayed in a variable manner for the decoration variation display unit displaying the game history. When the variation pattern command for commanding is input to the production control microcomputer 118, for example, taking the first decoration variation display portion 8k as an example, the variation pattern command reception flag is set in S628 of FIG. Is determined in S361, the first effect control process flag is switched in S372, the process proceeds to the first symbol variation start processing in S904 in FIG. 47, the display of the game history information is stopped, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed. It is switched to the image to do. Therefore, for each of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, the variation display of the decoration pattern is executed more preferentially than the display of the game history information. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of the fluctuation display of the display, especially the fluctuation display result of the decorative design. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to end the display of the displayed game history when the decorative symbol variation display is executed, it is possible to save time and effort for switching the display.

  (4) The recovery command from the game control microcomputer 99 is received by the effect control microcomputer 118 within a predetermined time after the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is possible to specify that the restoration process has been executed in step S3, and to specify that the initialization process has been executed in the game control microcomputer 99 when the effect control microcomputer 118 has not received within such a predetermined time. It is a signal that can be. Therefore, the game state data is determined based on whether or not the recovery command is input in the predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the production control microcomputer 118. It is confirmed whether it has been initialized. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the types of effect control commands used to check whether or not the game state data has been initialized.

  (5) For example, when the first game information display process of FIG. 50 is being executed, the variation pattern command reception waiting process of FIG. 48 including the step of switching the first effect control process to the first demonstration display process is not executed, After the end operation for displaying the history data, the first effect control process is switched to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process in S369, and the first demonstration display command reception flag is set in the first variation pattern command reception waiting processing. By being set, the first effect control process is switched to the first demonstration display process in S356, and the demonstration display is executed. Therefore, when the game history information is being displayed for each of the first decoration variation display unit 8k and the second decoration variation display unit 9k, when a demonstration display command is input to the effect control microcomputer 118, After the display of the game history information is completed in response to the operation by the operation key 190 in the decoration variation display section displaying the game history information, a demonstration image corresponding to the demonstration display command is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display of the game history information displayed according to the operation with the operation key 190 from being switched to the demonstration image unnecessarily. Thereby, waste of operation can be eliminated.

  (6) As shown in S422 and S423 in FIG. 41 and S363 and S366 in FIG. 50, the production control microcomputer 118 executes processing for displaying game history information based on the operation signal from the operation key 190. Therefore, the processing load of the game control microcomputer 99 related to displaying the game history can be reduced.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 4, the detection signal of the launch ball sensor 194 that detects a game ball to be thrown into the game area 7 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118, and is aggregated as history data in S383 of FIG. Therefore, based on the game history data, the number of game balls required for driving into the game area 7 before the big hit game state is generated can be grasped. For this reason, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a track record of easily generating a big hit gaming state is based on displaying the number of game balls required for driving into the gaming area 7 before the big hit gaming state occurs as a game history. The player can easily determine whether the gaming machine is superior or inferior.

  (8) Also, YES is obtained in S824 of the first symbol variation processing (S902) of the first embodiment, and control is performed not to execute the processing after S827, or in SA824 of the first symbol variation processing of the second embodiment. By determining YES and not executing the processing after SA827, for example, when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second decoration fluctuation display section 9k, the measurement of the fluctuation display time in the first decoration fluctuation display section 8k is interrupted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from occurring at the same time on the plurality of variation display units. Also, YES is determined in S821 of the first symbol variation processing (S902) of the first embodiment, and control is executed to execute the processing after S827, or YES is determined in SA821 of the first symbol variation processing of the second embodiment. By performing the control to execute the processing after SA827, for example, the decorative pattern variation display is performed in the first decorative variation display portion 8k until the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second decorative variation display portion 9k. For example, it can be made difficult for the player to grasp that the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second decoration variation display portion 9k.

  (9) When S826 displaying the changing message 100 is displayed and the measurement of the changing display time in the first changing display unit or the second changing display unit is interrupted by the same step in the second effect control process, Since the fact that the variable display in the variable display part 2 is displayed is displayed, the fluctuation of the identification information in the variable display part does not give a distrust that the variable display has been stopped. The display can be interrupted.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 59 (C) and FIG. 60 (C), the big hit gaming state is started based on the fact that the combination of big hit symbols is derived and displayed in one fluctuation display section, and the other fluctuation display is shown. When the measurement of the variation display time in the part is interrupted, the combination of the symbols that are separated from the other variation display part is stopped and displayed. For this reason, it is possible to suspend the variation display in the other variation display unit without giving the player a distrust that the variation display as the jackpot display result has been stopped. Furthermore, since the variation display of the identification information is stopped and displayed on the other variation display unit, the player can be focused on one variation display unit.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 61, when it is determined that the variation display result of one variation display unit is the jackpot display result, the display result of the one variation display is displayed on the other variation display unit. Since the jackpot notice as a notice to the effect that the jackpot display result is obtained is performed by continuous notice, the player can be interested in the fluctuation display of both the first fluctuation display section and the second fluctuation display section. .

  (12) As shown in S79b of FIG. 25 and S131 of FIG. 27, when the variation of the special symbol is started and when the data of the probability variation flag or the data of the short time flag is updated, S95 of FIG. As shown in S98, since the signal output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created when the variation display of the identification information is finished, the gaming state that is the basis for the determination of the game effect is displayed on the gaming machine. Can accurately grasp outside.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 6, the peripheral command relay board 57 has a unidirectional circuit as communication restriction means for allowing a signal input from the main board 120 to pass only in a direction toward the effect control board 90. 57a, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the effect control board 90 to the main board 120. Thereby, the illegal act performed with respect to the game control microcomputer 99 using the communication path between the main board 120 and the production | presentation control board 90 can be prevented.

  (14) A figure for determining the end of probability change based on the extracted value of the random counter R9 in S52a before the big hit determination in S56 to S58 of FIG. 24 cited in the third embodiment in the first special symbol process. As shown in the step S72a of the probability change end determination process 65 and the similar step in the second special symbol process, every time the big hit determination is performed, the probability change end determination process 52a is performed before the big hit determination is performed. Is performed, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state. Since the big hit determination is performed based on the determination as to whether or not to end the probability change state, the big hit determination to be performed based on whether or not the probability change state can be performed accurately.

  (15) S72 in FIG. 25 for determining the end of probability change based on the number of fluctuations at the time of probability variation in the stage before the big hit determination in S56 to S58 in FIG. 24 in the first special symbol process, and the second special symbol process As shown in the same step in FIG. 5, every time a big hit determination is made, a probability change end determination process 52a is performed at a stage before the big hit determination is made to determine whether or not to end the probability change state. Since the big hit determination is performed based on the determination as to whether or not to end the probability change state, the big hit determination to be performed based on whether or not the probability change state can be performed accurately.

  (16) For example, when a big hit display result is displayed on the second decoration fluctuation display unit 9k, the second big hit start command is received in SA824 of the first symbol fluctuation processing (S902) of the second embodiment. By performing control that does not execute the processing after S827 based on the above, when the production control microcomputer 118 receives the second big hit start command, the production control microcomputer 118 uses the special in the first decoration variation display portion 8k. The variable display of symbols is interrupted. Then, by performing control to execute YES after S827 in SA821 of the first symbol variation process (S902) of the second embodiment, when the big hit end command is received, the production control microcomputer 118 Since the variation display of the special symbol in the first decoration variation display portion 8k is resumed, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 99 can be reduced. In addition, since a plurality of instructions are given by one control signal (command), control can be performed using both control signals, and the number of control signals can be reduced.

  Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, power is supplied to the effect control microcomputer 118 to determine whether the game control microcomputer 99 has been initialized based on the operation of the clear switch 921. An example is shown in which a determination is made based on whether or not a recovery command is received within a predetermined time from the beginning (when the recovery command is not received, it is determined that initialization processing has been performed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the initialization process has been performed by the game control microcomputer 99 may be determined as follows. The recovery command is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99, and the initialization command is set to be transmitted when the initialization process is performed in the game control microcomputer 99 based on the operation of the clear switch 921. Then, when the production control microcomputer 118 receives the initialization command within a predetermined time from the start of power supply, it determines that the initialization process has been performed, and does not receive the initialization command within the predetermined time. Sometimes, it is determined that the recovery process has been performed by the game control microcomputer 99.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, the payout start command (payout start command) and the prize ball control signal are transmitted through the same signal line, but the signal lines for transmitting them may be separated. In the embodiment described above, the payout control microcomputer 660 transmits a prize ball BUSY signal in response to reception of the prize ball control signal. That is, bidirectional communication is performed for the prize ball control signal. However, the prize ball control signal may be transmitted by one-way communication (the game control microcomputer 99 does not take a response from the payout control microcomputer 660). Furthermore, the forms of the payout activation command and the prize ball control signal used in the above-described embodiment may be changed to other forms. For example, a 1-byte or 2-byte command may be transmitted via an 8-bit signal line. When a 2-byte command is used, a capture signal is transmitted for each byte.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal are output from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a power-off signal, a reset signal, and a clear signal may be output from the power supply board 910 to the payout control board 98 and input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98. As a result, the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 are input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98, thereby simplifying the wiring and reducing the cost of the gaming machine. be able to. In this case, the timing at which the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal are output from the payout control board 98 may be adjusted. For example, a process for delaying the timing of output to the main board 120 by the payout control microcomputer 660 may be performed. Further, when the payout control microcomputer 660 determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, a process of outputting to the main board 120 may be performed.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is mounted on the power supply board 910 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 may be mounted on the payout control board 98. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide at least a signal line (cable) for transmitting a power-off signal to the payout control board 98 from the power supply board 910. Therefore, the number of signal lines from the power supply board 910 to the electrical component control board can be further reduced. Furthermore, since the overall length of the signal line for transmitting the power-off signal between the substrates is shortened, the possibility of noise from the power-off signal can be reduced.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which DC power is supplied from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, DC power supplied from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 may be passed through the payout control board 98. Further, it may be transmitted / supplied to other sub-boards such as the effect control board 90 via the payout control board 98. According to such a configuration, only one power cable (including a plurality of types of power supply lines) for supplying power from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 may be installed. The installation position of the signal line for transmitting the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal is preferably away from the installation position of the power cable so that noise from the power supply does not get on. Since it is sufficient to pull out the power cable of the book, it becomes easy to separate the power cable from the signal line for transmitting the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the start-up of the game control microcomputer 99 is delayed by software has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game control microcomputer 99 is provided via a delay circuit. May be delayed in hardware (delayed by a hardware circuit). When the delay circuit is used, the start-up of the game control microcomputer 99 is delayed for a period determined by a preset delay amount. Specifically, the reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to both the payout control microcomputer 660 and the effect control microcomputer 118 and the delay circuit, and after a period determined by the delay amount has elapsed, the delay You may comprise so that a reset signal may be input into the game control microcomputer 99 from a circuit. The delay circuit may be provided on the power supply board 910 or on the payout control board 98.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the power-off signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is sent to both the payout control microcomputer 660 and the effect control microcomputer 118 and the game control microcomputer 99 at substantially the same timing. An example has been described in which the power supply stop signal process is executed on the game control side, the payout control side, and the effect control side at the same time as the power-off signal is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control is performed so that the timing at which the power supply stop process is started on the game control side precedes the timing at which the power supply stop process is started on the payout control side. May be. This delays the timing at which the power supply stop process is started on the payout control side when the power is cut off, thereby preventing a player from being disadvantaged due to a loss of a control signal from the game control microcomputer 99. Can do. As specific means, by executing the above-described software delay processing or by providing a delay circuit, a power-off signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is sent out and the effect control microcomputer 118 is controlled. The input timing may be delayed.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, the payout request is made by the prize ball REQ signal, and the number of payouts is designated by the prize ball control signal. However, the payout request and the number of payouts are designated by the prize ball control signal. It may be configured. In this case, the payout control microcomputer may determine that the payout request is made at the same time when the prize ball control signal is output. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to use the prize ball REQ signal.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the recording medium used in the card unit device 731 (recording medium processing apparatus) is a magnetic card (prepaid card). It may be a type of IC card. In addition, when the recording medium processing apparatus is configured to be able to identify the recording information based on the identification code, the recording medium can at least read the information such as the identification code that can identify the recording information. It may be something that can be recorded on. Further, the recording medium may be one in which a predetermined information recording symbol such as a barcode is printed so as to be readable. The shape of the recording medium is not limited to the card shape, and may be any shape such as a disk shape, a spherical shape, or a chip shape.

  (10) The pachinko gaming machine in the above-described embodiment mainly includes special symbols that are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) on the first special symbol display 8, the second special symbol display 9, etc., based on the winning prize. When the stop symbol of the game becomes a combination of a predetermined symbol, a predetermined game value can be given to the player (a pachinko gaming machine (first type pachinko gaming machine) controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state). However, a pachinko gaming machine (second type of pachinko gaming machine) that allows a player to be given a predetermined gaming value when a predetermined area of an electric accessory to be released based on the starting prize is awarded, or a starting prize A pachinko machine (second type of pachinko game) in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol that is variably displayed based on the combination becomes a predetermined symbol combination ) It may be.

  (11) In the above-described embodiments, different expressions such as transmission / reception and output / input are used for the exchange of various signals, but transmission and output or reception and input are used in substantially the same meaning. Needless to say, these expressions are interchangeable. In addition, the transmission / reception of signals having many meanings such as control commands is made transmission / reception, and the transmission / reception and output / input are made of transmission / reception of signals for transmitting information by switching on / off. There are also cases where they are used properly. Even in this case, these expressions are interchangeable.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the on / off state of the signal may be a high level state / low level state, and conversely may be a low level state / high level state. Further, the ON / OFF state of the output signal may be a signal output state / signal output stop state, or conversely, may be a signal output stop state / signal output state. Similarly, the ON / OFF state of the input signal may be a signal input state / signal input stop state, or conversely, may be a signal input stop state / signal input state.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the game shop menu screen and the player menu screen are displayed on the first decoration variation display unit 8k or the second decoration variation display unit 9k is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game store menu screen and the player menu screen are different from the first decoration variation display portion 8k and the second decoration variation display portion 9k. In game machines that display special symbols in a variable manner, a display device that displays special symbols in a variable manner, and in the second type of gaming machine described above, a display device that performs variable display that determines the number of rounds of big hits) You may make it display.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, an effect control microcomputer capable of comprehensively controlling display control, sound control, and lamp control is provided as means for controlling the effect of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a microcomputer for performing display control, a microcomputer for performing sound control, and a microcomputer for performing lamp control are provided, and the microcomputer for game control has a display control for each of these microcomputers. A configuration may be employed in which a command, a sound control command, and a lamp control command are given, and each microcomputer individually executes each control in accordance with the command.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the clear signal is input from the power supply board 910 to the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120 via the input circuit 121 and the like, and the game control microcomputer 99 main In the example, an initialization command as a clear signal for payout control is input from the output circuit 662 of the main board 120 to the payout control board 98 by the processing. Not limited to this, a clear signal is input from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 via the input circuit 121, and from the output circuit 662 of the main board 120 to the payout control board 98 without going through the game control microcomputer 99. You may employ | adopt the structure which inputs.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, the example in which the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set simultaneously due to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state based on the variation display result of the probability variation jackpot symbol combination has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The probability variation flag is set based on the occurrence of the big hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the probability variation big hit symbol combination, and the time reduction flag is set based on the establishment of the probability variation end condition. Also good. In this case, when the probability variation flag is set, control may be performed to the above-described probability variation state and time-short state, and when the time-short flag is set, control may be performed only to the time-short state described above. The timing at which the probability variation flag is set may be before or after the timing at which the variation display for deriving and displaying the probability variation jackpot symbol as a display result is started, and is controlled to be set when the variation display is started. Alternatively, it may be controlled to be set immediately before the change display is started. In addition, the timing at which the probability variation flag is reset may be before or after the timing at which the variable display that establishes the probability variation end condition is started, and is controlled to be reset when the variation display is started. Or may be controlled to be reset immediately before the change display is started. The timing flag may be set before and after the timing at which the variable display that establishes the probability variation end condition is started, and may be controlled to be set when the variable display is started. It may be controlled to be set immediately before the change display is started. The timing for resetting the time reduction flag may be before or after the timing at which the variable display that establishes the time reduction end condition is started, and may be controlled to be reset when the variable display is started. The control may be performed so as to be reset immediately before the change display is started.

  (17) In the probability variation end determination process of FIG. 65 in the above-described embodiment, when the probability variation flag is set (YES in step S71), when the probability variation variation count matches the probability variation termination count (step S71). The example in which the probability variation flag is reset (step S75) when it is determined whether or not the extracted value of R9 matches the end determination value (YES in step S72a) is determined (NO in S72). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the probability variation end determination process of FIG. 65, when the probability variation flag is set (YES in step S71), it is determined whether or not the extracted value of R9 matches the termination determination value. Only when they match (YES in step S72a), the probability variation flag may be reset (step S75). That is, without performing the process of step S72, when it is determined YES in step S71, the process may be shifted to step 72a.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the probability variation end count and the short-time end count are set in advance to the same number (for example, 100 times) has been described. It may be set in advance so that the number of time reduction ends is increased, or conversely, it may be set in advance so that the number of probability variation ends is larger than the number of time reduction ends. Further, the probability variation end count and the time reduction end count may be determined using a random counter or the like. For example, when setting the probability variation flag, a random number is extracted from a random counter for determining the probability variation end count, and the probability variation end is performed using the extracted random number. The number of times may be determined. Similarly, when the time reduction flag is set, a random number may be extracted from a random counter for determining the number of time reduction ends, and the number of time reduction ends may be determined using the extracted random number.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the example has been described in which the upper limit number that can be reserved is set to be the same in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer. You may set so that the upper limit number which can be reserved-stored in one hold-storage buffer becomes larger than the upper limit number which can be hold-stored in another hold-storage buffer. For example, the upper limit number to be determined in step S42 in FIG. 22 is set to, for example, “10” in the first start port switch passing process and “5” in the second start port switch passing process. You may make it make a number differ.

  (20) In the embodiment described above, when a start winning occurs, the value of each random counter such as the big hit determination random counter R1 is extracted and stored in the holding storage buffer (see step S46 in FIG. 22). An example has been described in which values are read in the stored order (step S53), jackpot determination (step S56, etc.) is performed and the variable display is performed when the corresponding special symbol display is not performing the variable display. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the value extracted from each random counter such as the big hit determination random counter R1 is temporarily stored in the holding storage buffer when the corresponding special symbol display is not displaying the fluctuation, and the corresponding special symbol display is performed. It may be stored when fluctuation display is performed in the instrument. Then, when the variable display is not performed on the corresponding special symbol display, the temporarily stored value may be read immediately, the big hit determination may be performed, and the variable display may be performed.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, the first ornament variation display portion 8k is provided on the left side and the second ornament variation display portion 9k is provided on the right side toward the center of the game area 7. The example in which the first special symbol display 8 is provided above the first decoration variation display portion 8k and the second special symbol display 81 is disposed below the second decoration variation display portion 9k has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arrangement of the first and second decoration variation display units and the first and second special symbol displays can be arbitrarily changed according to the configuration and specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the first and second decorative variation display units and the first and second special symbol displays do not need to be configured as independent display devices, respectively. For example, a display area of one display device is divided. A plurality of display areas may be formed.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, when the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 99 starts the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display, the variation pattern indicating the variation display time is determined, and the variation A variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the effect control CPU 118a of the effect control microcomputer 118 changes from the change pattern command received when starting the change display of the decorative design in each of the first decoration change display unit 8k and the second decoration change display unit 9k. The example of determining the pattern and controlling the display of the decorative design has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 99 controls the variation pattern command when the start winning to the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 14, the second starting winning opening 16) occurs. You may comprise so that it may transmit to the board | substrate 90. FIG.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of variations including a first variation display unit and a second variation display unit capable of individually performing a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Although a gaming machine that has a display unit and is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display in any of the variable display units becomes a predetermined specific display result has been described, For example, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display unit is derived and displayed, so that one game is finished and the variable display is displayed. It may be a slot machine or the like that can generate a predetermined prize according to the display result of the section.

  Further, as long as the gaming machine has a display device, for example, a general electric machine or a gaming machine with a probability setting function called a pachi-kon may be used. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied not only to a CR type ball game machine that lends a ball using a prepaid card, but also to a game machine that lends a ball using cash. In other words, any form of game machine may be used as long as it has a display device such as an LCD and can display the symbols as identification information in a variable manner. In addition, the game is not limited to a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but an enclosed game that encloses a game ball and gives points in response to detection of the winning ball It can also be applied to machines.

  The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the short time state in which the variable display is continued until the predetermined number of times is executed is started simultaneously with the start of the probability changing state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-short state may be controlled to start when the probability variation state ends and thereafter continue until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. In that case, the time-short state may be set during the probability changing state, and the time-short state may not be set.

  (25) S75 in FIG. 25 in the first special symbol process, S127 in FIG. 27, and similar steps in the second special symbol process, the probability variation state control means (FIG. 27 in the first special symbol process). When the probability variation state (probability variation state) is controlled by S126, S127, S75 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 65, S112 in FIG. 26, and the same special step in the second special symbol process, the probability variation ends. Conditions (non-probability big hit occurs in FIG. 27, the number of fluctuations at the time of probability variation becomes the number of times of probability change in FIG. When the extracted value becomes the probability variation end judgment value), the probability variation state storage means (of the game control microcomputer 99 in FIG. 4) Probability of updating the probability variation state data (set probability variation flag data) stored in the AM 55) to non-probability variation state data (reset probability variation flag data) indicating that the probability variation state is not established Fluctuation state data updating means is configured. The probability variation state data update means updates the probability variation state data to the non-probability variation state data when the probability variation end condition is satisfied and the display control means starts the variation display of the identification information (first probability variation state data). 25 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 65 in one special symbol process, S127 in FIG. 27, and the same steps in the second special symbol process). When such an update is performed, “when the display control means starts the variable display of the identification information”, the variable display is displayed immediately after the probability change flag as shown in S52a of FIG. 24 is updated to the reset state. In addition to the meaning of “when starting variable display” when it is started, “when starting variable display” when the probability variation flag is updated to the reset state immediately after the start of variable display is included.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, the first big hit execution flag is set in S84 in the first special symbol variation process of FIG. 28, that is, the first big hit execution flag is set when the combination of big hit symbols is stopped. In the second special symbol variation process corresponding to the first special symbol variation process of FIG. 28, the measurement interruption means for interrupting the measurement of the variation display time has been described. Similarly, in the second special symbol variation process corresponding to the first special symbol variation process of FIG. 28, the second big hit execution flag is set, that is, when the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped, the second big hit execution flag is set. Then, the measurement interruption means for setting the interruption flag and interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation display time in S88 of the first special symbol fluctuation process of FIG. 28 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the first big hit running flag is set in the first big winning opening opening pre-processing when the process proceeds from S204 to S205 in FIG. 28, that is, the first big hit is being executed when the big hit is started. It may be a measurement interruption unit that sets a flag and interrupts the measurement of the variation display time in the second special symbol variation process corresponding to the first special symbol variation process of FIG. Similarly, the second big hit running flag is set in the second big winning opening opening pre-processing corresponding to the second special symbol process, that is, the second big hit running flag is set when starting the big hit. Measurement interruption means for setting an interruption flag in S88 of the first special symbol fluctuation process and interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation display time may be used.

  (27) In the embodiment described above, the variation pattern command input from the game control microcomputer 99 to the effect control microcomputer 118 is looked up when the probability variation state of FIG. 9 is in (c). An example has been described in which it is determined whether or not the probability variation state has ended in S401 of FIG. 45 based on whether or not the probability variation pattern command (such as a normal E variation pattern command during probability variation) determined using the data table. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game control microcomputer 99 outputs a probability change end command to the effect control microcomputer 118 as an effect control command when the probability change flag is reset in S75 of FIG. The microcomputer 118 may be configured to determine whether or not the probability variation state is terminated when the probability variation end command is received.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which there are a plurality (two) of variable display units that display a special symbol and a decorative symbol in a variable manner has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one variable display unit that displays special symbols and decorative symbols in a variable manner.

  (29) In the embodiment described above, as the special game state, for example, there are a plurality of probability variation control modes controlled to the probability variation state and the time reduction state, and time reduction control modes controlled to the time reduction state without being controlled to the probability variation state. The example which combined the control mode was demonstrated. However, regardless of such a combination, the special game state includes a special game state that is controlled only in the probability variation control mode after the end of the big hit game state, and only the short time control mode after the end of the big hit game state (that is, only the short time state). The game state may not be based on a combination of control modes, such as a special game state that is controlled by the player, or a special game state that is controlled only by the probability change state without being controlled to the short-time state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the special game state is not limited to the game state including the probability change state and the short time state shown in the above-described embodiment, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the specific display result ( Other gaming states may be used as long as the gaming state is likely to become a big hit symbol. For example, for a special gaming state that is controlled only in the time-saving control mode (time-saving state) after the big hit gaming state, the time saving is performed as special gaming state data indicating that the game is in the special gaming state when the special gaming state is entered. Only the flag is set, and the short time flag set as the special game state data is reset as non-special game state data indicating that the special game state is not in effect when the special game state ends.

  (30) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view which shows the structure of an operation key. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship between a main board | substrate, various control boards, and an electrical component. It is a block diagram which shows the component relevant to payout, such as a payout control board and a ball payout apparatus. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of an effect control board and a voice frame lamp board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random counters which the microcomputer for game control uses for game control. It is a figure for demonstrating the data table which memorize | stored the judgment value used in order to select and determine the fluctuation pattern in a 1st fluctuation display part and a 2nd fluctuation display part. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random counters which the microcomputer for production control uses for production control. It is a figure for demonstrating the production content selection table which the microcomputer for production control uses for selection of production content. It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement of the 1st fluctuation | variation display part in a probability variation state and a time-short state, and a 2nd fluctuation | variation display part. It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement of the 1st fluctuation | variation display part in a probability variation state and a time-short state, and a 2nd fluctuation | variation display part. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the timer interruption process performed with the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control microcomputer from the game control microcomputer. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of the method of outputting a prize ball control signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the 1st special symbol process process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the 1st start port switch passage process demonstrated by the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the 1st random number determination process demonstrated by the 1st start port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process at the time of probability change in a 1st special symbol normal process and a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process in a 1st special symbol normal process and a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is an explanatory view showing the configuration of a production control command. It is an explanatory view showing how to send the production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command sent to an effect control board. It is a display screen figure which shows the menu screen for game stores. It is a display screen figure which shows a history data clear screen and an option screen. It is a display screen figure which shows the menu screen for players. It is a display screen figure which shows a jackpot information screen, an effect introduction screen, and a jackpot probability screen. It is a display screen figure which shows a start winning ratio screen, a jackpot ratio screen, and a slump graph screen. It is a flowchart which shows the production control main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the data management process at the time of initialization. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-off process which the microcomputer for effect control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-off process which the microcomputer for effect control performs. It is a flowchart for demonstrating command analysis processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a probability change completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a 1st announcement effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process in the 1st production control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variation pattern command reception waiting process in a 2nd effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st game information display process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st symbol variation process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an additional production | presentation process. It is a flowchart which shows game data collection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st symbol variation process by 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect display of a 1st decoration fluctuation display part and a 2nd decoration fluctuation display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect display of a 1st decoration fluctuation display part and a 2nd decoration fluctuation display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the continuous notice as an example of the effect display in a 1st decoration fluctuation display part and a 2nd decoration fluctuation display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big prize opening determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random counters which the microcomputer for game control by 3rd Embodiment uses for game control. It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement of the 1st fluctuation | variation display part and a 2nd fluctuation | variation display part in the probability variation state and time-short state by 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the end determination process at the time of probability change by 3rd Embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

  7 gaming area, 731 card unit device, 14 first start winning opening, 16 second starting winning opening, 8 first special symbol display, 8k first decoration variation display section, 9 second special symbol display, 9k second Decoration variation display unit, 48 special variable winning ball device, 58 ordinary variable winning ball device, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 99 gaming control microcomputer, 120 main board, 118 production control microcomputer, 910 power supply board, 921 clear switch, 3 Ball supply tray, 190 operation keys, 191 enter key, 192 up key, 193 down key, 121 input circuit, 55 RAM, 54 ROM, 130 hit ball launcher, 194 launch ball sensor.

Claims (12)

A display device is provided that displays a display result by variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the specific display result is derived and displayed on the display device. Based on the specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed among the specific display results, and after the end of the specific gaming state, the display result of the variable display is A gaming machine that is controlled to a probability variation state in which the probability of a specific display result is higher than a normal gaming state different from the specific gaming state,
A game control board mounted with a game control microcomputer for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game and outputting a display control signal for controlling the display device;
A display control board equipped with a display control microcomputer for controlling the display device based on the display control signal;
Initialization operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine and outputting an initialization signal in accordance with the operation;
Provided on the front side of the gaming machine, for display operation for displaying a history of games played on the gaming machine on the display device when a predetermined operation screen is displayed on the display device Operating means,
The game control microcomputer is:
Display result determination means for determining in advance whether or not the display result of the variable display in the display device is the specific display result;
First state control that controls to the first state that controls to the probability variation state until the first termination condition is satisfied, and controls to the variation time shortening state in which the variation display time of the identification information is shortened from the normal gaming state Means,
After the first state ends, until the second end condition is satisfied, the second state control means for controlling to the non-stochastic variation state and controlling to the second state to control to the variation time reduction state,
The probability variation state data indicating whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state is set to the probability variation state data indicating that the state is in the probability variation state when shifting to the probability variation state, and the probability variation state is Probability change state data setting means for setting to non-stochastic change state data indicating that it is not a probability change state when finished,
The time reduction state data indicating whether or not the gaming state is the variation time reduction state is set to the variation time reduction state data indicating that the variation time reduction state is in effect when the transition to the variation time reduction state, A time-short state data setting means for setting non-variable time shortened state data indicating that the variable time shortened state is not reached when the variable time shortened state ends;
Based on the determination result by the display result determination means, the display time data indicating the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A variable display data selection means for selecting from the display time table;
Fluctuation display time measuring means for measuring the fluctuation display time of fluctuations executed based on the display time data selected by the fluctuation display data selection means;
A variable display time determination unit that determines whether or not the variable display time measured by the variable display time measurement unit has reached a variable display time indicated by the display time data selected by the variable display data selection unit;
Storing game state data indicating a progress state of the game, and storing the game state data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
An initialization signal input unit to which the initialization signal output from the initialization operation means is input;
Game control side initialization signal confirmation means for confirming whether or not the initialization signal is input to the initialization signal input unit;
On the condition that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and it is confirmed that the initialization signal is not input by the game control side initialization signal confirmation means, it is stored in the game control storage means. Game control recovery means for executing a game control recovery process for recovering the progress state of the game based on the game state data being
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and it is confirmed by the game control side initialization signal confirmation means that the initialization signal is input, the game control storage means stores the Game control initialization means for executing a game control initialization process for initializing game state data,
The display control microcomputer is:
In the display device, when the display of the identification information is started to be changed and the change display time determination means determines that the change display time indicated by the display time data selected by the change display data selection means has elapsed. Variable display control means for performing control for deriving and displaying a display result according to the determination of the determination means;
Based on a display control signal from the game control microcomputer, notification control means for performing control for notifying that the variation time reduction state,
Based on a display control signal from the game control microcomputer, game history data creating means for creating the game history data indicating a history of games played in the gaming machine;
Display control storage means for storing game history data created by the game history data creation means, and storing the game history data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
A game history display process for executing a game history display process for displaying the game history on the display device based on the game history data stored in the display control storage unit in response to an operation of the display operation unit. Means,
Based on a display control signal from the game control microcomputer, game state data initialization confirmation means for confirming whether or not the game state data is initialized in the game control microcomputer;
On the condition that power supply to the gaming machine is started and the gaming state data initialization confirming means confirms that the gaming state data has not been initialized, the display control Game history recovery means for enabling display of a game history display based on the game history data stored in the storage means;
An initialization operation for initializing the gaming history data when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the gaming state data initialization confirmation means confirms that the gaming state data has been initialized. An operation screen display means for displaying an operation screen;
An enabling means for enabling an initialization operation for initializing a game history by the display operation means only when the initialization operation screen is displayed by the operation screen display means;
Initialization operation determination means for determining whether or not the initialization operation by the display operation means has been performed when the initialization operation is enabled by the enabling means;
A game for executing a game history initialization process for initializing the game history data stored in the display control storage means on condition that the initialization operation determination means determines that an initialization operation has been performed. History initialization means, and
The variable display data selection means is, when the time-short state data is set to the variable time shortening state data, when the variable time shortening state is used when the display time table is shifted to the variable time shortening state. When display time data is selected from the usage table and the time reduction state data is set to non-variable time reduced state data, it is used when the display time table is shifted to the non-variable time reduced state. Select the display time data from the non-variable time reduction status table,
When the probability variation state data setting means is shifted to the probability variation state, the variation display data selection means is based on a determination result that is a specific display result other than the special display result by the display result determination means. A gaming machine, wherein the probability variation state data is set to non-stochastic variation state data when the variation display of the identification information based on the selected display time data is started. The display control microcomputer is:
After the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the change of the identification information on the display device over a predetermined period in the variable display enabled state in which the identification information that can be individually identified on the display device can be variably displayed. Fluctuation display determination means for determining whether or not display is performed,
When it is determined that the variable display is not performed by the variable display determination means, the game history based on the game history data can be displayed in accordance with the operation by the display operation means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising normal operation screen display means for displaying a screen. The display control microcomputer is:
In the display device, when the game history is being displayed on the display device and a display control signal for instructing the variable display of the identification information that can be identified is input to the display control microcomputer. A game history stopping means for stopping display of the game history;
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a change display switching means for switching the display on the display device to the change display of the identification information when the game history is stopped by the game history stop means. . The gaming control microcomputer is capable of specifying that one of the gaming control restoration processing and the gaming control initialization processing is executed after power supply to the gaming machine is started. A display control signal output processing means for performing a process of outputting a supply start process specific signal as the display control signal;
The display control microcomputer determines whether or not the power supply start process specific signal is input during a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. It further includes an input determination means,
The game state data initialization confirmation means confirms whether or not the game state data has been initialized based on the determination by the start time processing specific signal input determination means. A gaming machine according to any one of the above. The game control microcomputer further includes a demonstration display control signal output means for outputting a demonstration display control signal for instructing to display a demonstration image that is displayed when the identification information that can be identified is not variably displayed for a predetermined period. Including
When the display control microcomputer receives the demonstration display control signal output from the demonstration display control signal output means, the display of the game history is terminated in the display device in response to an operation by the display operation means. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising demo display switching means for displaying a demonstration image corresponding to the demo display control signal after the display. The display operation means inputs an operation signal output according to an operation to the display control microcomputer,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game history display processing means executes the game history display processing based on the operation signal. A game area provided with a predetermined prize area;
And a launching means for launching a game ball to be shot into the game area,
The game control microcomputer outputs the display control signal for variably displaying the identification information on the display device when the start condition is satisfied in response to a game ball winning in the winning area. ,
Further comprising a game ball number counting means for counting the number of game balls to be driven into the game area;
7. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control storage unit stores the number of game balls counted by the game ball number counting unit as the game history data. The display device includes a plurality of variable display units for performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and deriving and displaying a display result,
The display result determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display of the variable display unit that satisfies the start condition is set as the specific display result when the start condition defined for each of the plurality of variable display units is satisfied. To determine in advance,
In the game control microcomputer, the display state determination unit determines that the display result of any one of the plurality of change display units is set as the specific display result by the display result determination unit. Further comprising a specific gaming state control means for controlling,
The variation display time measuring means is
Based on the determination of the display result determination means, the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit among the plurality of variation display units, and the second variation is different from the first variation display unit. When the variation display of the identification information is performed on the display unit, the variation display on the second variation display unit at the first time point when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit. A measurement interruption means for interrupting time measurement;
Measurement that resumes measurement of the variable display time interrupted by the measurement interrupting means at a second time point when the specific gaming state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed on the first variable display unit The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising restarting means.   Suspending fluctuation continuation display means for displaying that the fluctuation display in the second fluctuation display section is continued when the measurement of the fluctuation display time in the second fluctuation display section is interrupted by the measurement interruption means. The gaming machine according to claim 8, further comprising:   When the measurement of the variation display time in the second variation display unit is suspended by the measurement suspension unit at the first time point, the second variation display unit displays a display result different from the specific display result. The gaming machine according to claim 8 or 9, further comprising non-specific display result display means for interrupting and displaying a non-specific display result.   When it is determined by the determining means that the display result of the variable display of the first variable display unit is the specific display result, the display result of the variable display is the specific display in the second variable display unit. 11. The gaming machine according to claim 8, further comprising a notice notifying unit for notifying that a display result is obtained. The game control microcomputer is:
When the variation display of the identification information is started, the probability variation state data set by the probability variation state data setting unit or the signal that can specify the time-short state data set by the time-short state data setting unit is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11, further comprising signal output means for outputting when the display is completed.

Images